Product guide | EMC 69001166 Portable Media Storage User Manual

EMC Installation Roadmap
for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
P/N 069001166
REV A17
EMC Corporation
Corporate Headquarters:
Hopkinton, MA 01748 -9103
1-508 -435 -1000
www.EMC.com
Copyright © 2002-2005, EMC Corporation. All rights reserved.
Published January, 2005
EMC believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The
information is subject to change without notice.
THE INFORMATION IN THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS." EMC CORPORATION
MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WITH RESPECT TO THE
INFORMATION IN THIS PUBLICATION, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Use, copying, and distribution of any EMC software described in this publication requires an
applicable software license.
Trademark Information
EMC2, EMC, CLARiiON, Navisphere, PowerPath, Symmetrix are registered trademarks and Access Logix, FLARE, MirrorView, Powerlink, SAN Copy,
and SnapView are trademarks of EMC Corporation.
All other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.
ii
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Contents
Chapter 1
AIX Installation Checklists
PowerPath Configurations for AIX............................................... 1-2
Required Host Software Revisions......................................... 1-2
Prerequisites .............................................................................. 1-3
Documentation.......................................................................... 1-4
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and New Storage
System................................................................................................ 1-6
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and Existing Storage
System.............................................................................................. 1-12
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and New Storage
System.............................................................................................. 1-22
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and Existing Storage
System.............................................................................................. 1-29
Chapter 2
HP-UX Installation Checklist
PowerPath Configurations for HP-UX ......................................... 2-2
Required Host Software Revisions......................................... 2-3
Prerequisites .............................................................................. 2-3
Documentation.......................................................................... 2-4
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and New Storage
System................................................................................................ 2-7
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and Existing Storage
System.............................................................................................. 2-13
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and New Storage
System.............................................................................................. 2-26
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and Existing
Storage System ............................................................................... 2-33
DMP Configurations for HP-UX ................................................. 2-45
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
iii
Contents
Required Host Software Revisions ...................................... 2-46
Prerequisites ............................................................................ 2-46
Documentation ....................................................................... 2-47
DMP Checklist - New HP-UX Server and New Storage
System ............................................................................................. 2-48
Configurations for HP-UX Without EMC Failover Software.. 2-53
Prerequisites ............................................................................ 2-53
Documentation ....................................................................... 2-54
Without EMC Failover Software Checklist - New HP-UX Server
and New Storage System.............................................................. 2-55
Chapter 3
Linux Installation Checklist
PowerPath Configurations for Linux ........................................... 3-2
Required Host Software Revisions ........................................ 3-3
Prerequisites .............................................................................. 3-3
Documentation ......................................................................... 3-4
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and New Storage
System ............................................................................................... 3-7
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and Existing Storage
System ............................................................................................. 3-13
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and New Storage
System ............................................................................................. 3-23
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and Existing
Storage System ............................................................................... 3-29
DMP Configurations for Linux.................................................... 3-39
Required Host Software Revisions ...................................... 3-39
Prerequisites ............................................................................ 3-39
Documentation ....................................................................... 3-40
DMP Checklist - New Linux Server and New Storage
System ............................................................................................. 3-42
Configurations for Linux Without EMC Failover Software .... 3-47
Prerequisites ............................................................................ 3-47
Documentation ....................................................................... 3-48
Without EMC Failover Software Checklist — New Linux Server
and New Storage System.............................................................. 3-49
iv
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Contents
Chapter 4
NetWare Installation Checklists
PowerPath Configurations for NetWare...................................... 4-2
Required Host Software Revisions ........................................ 4-3
Prerequisites.............................................................................. 4-3
Documentation ......................................................................... 4-4
PowerPath Checklist — New NetWare Server and New Storage
System ............................................................................................... 4-7
PowerPath Checklist — New NetWare Server and Existing
Storage System............................................................................... 4-12
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and New
Storage System............................................................................... 4-21
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and Existing
Storage System............................................................................... 4-28
Chapter 5
Solaris Installation Checklists
PowerPath Configurations for Solaris ......................................... 5-2
Required Host Software Revisions ........................................ 5-3
Prerequisites.............................................................................. 5-3
Documentation ......................................................................... 5-4
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and New Storage
System ............................................................................................... 5-8
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and Existing Storage
System ............................................................................................. 5-14
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and New Storage
System ............................................................................................. 5-25
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and Existing
Storage System............................................................................... 5-32
DMP Configurations for Solaris.................................................. 5-45
Required Host Software Revisions ...................................... 5-45
Prerequisites ........................................................................... 5-45
Documentation ....................................................................... 5-46
DMP Checklist - New Solaris Server and New Storage
System ............................................................................................. 5-48
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
v
Contents
Chapter 6
Tru64 UNIX Installation Checklist
Tru64 UNIX Configurations ...........................................................
Prerequisites ..............................................................................
Documentation .........................................................................
Checklist - New Tru64 UNIX Server and New Storage System
Without Boot Disk ...........................................................................
Checklist - New Tru64 UNIX Server and New Storage System
With Boot Disk .................................................................................
Chapter 7
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-6
Windows Installation Checklists
PowerPath Configurations for Windows ..................................... 7-2
Required Host Software Revisions ........................................ 7-3
Prerequisites .............................................................................. 7-4
Documentation ......................................................................... 7-5
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and New Storage
System ............................................................................................... 7-7
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing
Storage System Without Boot Disk ............................................. 7-14
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing
Storage System With Boot Disk ................................................... 7-25
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and New
Storage System ............................................................................... 7-37
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and Existing
Storage System ............................................................................... 7-45
DMP Configurations for Windows ............................................. 7-57
Required Host Software Revisions ...................................... 7-57
Prerequisites ............................................................................ 7-58
Documentation ....................................................................... 7-59
DMP Checklist — New Windows Server and New Storage
System ............................................................................................. 7-60
Using Windows DMP ............................................................ 7-64
Appendix A
Customer Support
Overview of Detecting and Resolving Problems ...................... A-2
Troubleshooting the Problem ....................................................... A-3
Before Calling the Customer Support Center ............................ A-4
Documenting the Problem ........................................................... A-5
Reporting a New Problem ............................................................ A-6
Sending Problem Documentation ............................................... A-7
vi
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Preface
This manual contains checklists of the tasks required to install an
EMC CX-Series or FC4700-Series storage system in a configuration
with a server running the AIX®, HP-UX®, IRIX®, Linux®, Novell®
NetWare®, Solaris™, Tru64® UNIX®, Windows Server™ 2003, or
Windows® 2000 operating system.
As part of an effort to improve and enhance the performance and capabilities
of its product line, EMC from time to time releases revisions of its hardware
and software. Therefore, some functions described in this roadmap may not
be supported by all revisions of the software or hardware currently in use.
For the most up-to-date information on product features, refer to your
product release notes.
If a product does not function properly or does not function as described in
this roadmap, please contact your EMC representative.
Audience
This roadmap is intended for use by system administrators and/or
service personnel during installation of CLARiiON® Fibre Channel
storage systems.
Readers of this roadmap should be familiar with the following topics:
◆
The operating system running on the server that you are
installing.
◆
How the operating system handles the device names of physical
disks (LUNs).
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
vii
Preface
Organization
Conventions Used in
This Guide
Chapter 1
Installation checklist for an AIX server with EMC
PowerPath® software.
Chapter 2
Installation checklist for an HP-UX server with and
without EMC PowerPath or VERITAS® DMP.
Chapter 3
Installation checklist for a Linux server with and
without EMC PowerPath or VERITAS® DMP.
Chapter 4
Installation checklist for a NetWare server with EMC
PowerPath software.
Chapter 5
Installation checklists for a Solaris server with EMC
PowerPath or VERITAS DMP software.
Chapter 6
Installation checklist for a Tru64 UNIX server.
Chapter 7
Installation checklists for a Microsoft Windows Server
2003 or Windows 2000 server with EMC PowerPath or
VERITAS® DMP software.
Appendix A
Reviews the EMC process for detecting and resolving
software problems, and provides essential questions
that you should answer before contacting the EMC
Customer Support Center.
EMC uses the following conventions for notes and cautions.
A note presents information that is important, but not hazard-related.
!
CAUTION
A caution contains information essential to avoid damage to the
system or equipment. The caution may apply to hardware or
software.
viii
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Preface
Typographical Conventions
This manual uses the following format conventions
This
typeface
◆
◆
◆
◆
This typeface
◆
◆
Finding Current
Information
Specific filenames or complete paths.
Dialog box names and menu items in text.
Selections you can make from the user interface,
including buttons, icons, options, and field
names.
Emphasis in cautions and warnings.
New terms or unique word usage in text.
Command line arguments when used in text.
Represents a system response (such as a
message or prompt), a file or program listing.
This
typeface
◆
x > y
Represents a menu path. For example, Operations
> Poll All Storage Systems tells you to select Poll
All Storage Systems on the Operations menu.
The most up-to-date information about the CX-Series and FC-Series
storage systems is posted on the EMC Powerlink™ website. We
recommend that you download the latest information before you
install one of these storage systems. If you purchased your storage
system from an EMC reseller and you cannot access Powerlink, the
latest product information should be available from your reseller.
To access EMC Powerlink, use the following link:
http://powerlink.emc.com
After you log in, select Support > Document Library and find the
documents you want.
Where to Get Help
For questions about technical support, call your local sales office or
service provider.
If you have a valid EMC service contract, contact EMC Customer
Service at:
United States: (800) 782-4362 (SVC-4EMC)
Canada:
(800) 543-4782 (543-4SVC)
Worldwide:
(508) 497-7901
Follow the voice menu prompts to open a service call and select the
applicable product support.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
ix
Preface
Sales and Customer
Service Contacts
For the list of EMC sales locations, please access the EMC home page
at:
http://www.EMC.com/contact/
For additional information on the EMC products and services
available to customers and partners, refer to the EMC Powerlink™
website:
http://powerlink.EMC.com
Your Comments
x
Your suggestions will help us continue to improve the accuracy,
organization, and overall quality of the user publications. Please send
a message to techpub_comments@EMC.com with your opinions of
this guide.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
1
Invisible Body Tag
AIX Installation
Checklists
This chapter contains checklists of the tasks required to install a
CLARiiON storage system in a configuration with an IBM AIX®
server and PowerPath® failover software. The sections for the
different configurations are
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
PowerPath Configurations for AIX .................................................1-2
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and New Storage
System..................................................................................................1-6
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and Existing Storage
System................................................................................................1-12
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and New Storage
System................................................................................................1-22
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and Existing Storage
System................................................................................................1-29
AIX Installation Checklists
1-1
AIX Installation Checklists
PowerPath Configurations for AIX
Read this section if you are installing a AIX PowerPath configuration
with a new or existing server and a new or existing storage system. A
new and existing server and a new and existing storage system are
defined as follows:
new server - A server running AIX and not connected to any storage
system.
existing server - A server running AIX and that is already connected
to one or more storage systems.
new storage system - A CX300, CX500, or CX700 storage system that
has the factory default settings and has never been connected to a
server.
existing storage system - A CX300, CX400, CX500, CX600, CX700, or
FC4700-Series storage system that is already connected to one or
more servers and is in a EMC Navisphere® domain.
All CLARiiON storage systems connected to the server must be CX300,
CX400, CX500, CX600, CX700, or FC4700-Series storage systems. If any other
type of CLARiiON storage system is connected to the server, the server
cannot run AIX PowerPath.
Required Host
Software Revisions
◆
AIX operating system revision listed in the EMC Support Matrix
on the Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
HBA driver revision listed in the EMC Support Matrix on the
Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
AIX PowerPath
• For CX400, CX600, and FC-Series storage systems
Version 3.0.0 with patch 3.0.2 or higher
• For CX300, CX500, and CX700 storage systems
Version 3.0.4 or higher
Refer to the EMC Support Matrix and the EMC PowerPath Release Notes for
UNIX on the Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com) for the
specific revision required for your AIX version.
1-2
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
AIX Installation Checklists
Prerequisites
◆
You must have a host that is
• Running an operating system that can support the Navisphere
Manager 6.X browser-based client. For an up-to-date list of
such operating systems, refer to the Navisphere Manager 6.X
release notes on http://powerlink.emc.com).
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system server
and that you will connect to the SPs in the storage system.
◆
For most configurations, you must also have a host that is
• Running Navisphere CLI version 6.X.
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system server
and that you will connect to SPs in the storage system.
◆
You must have planned your LUNs and RAID Groups, and
Storage Groups if you have Access Logix. Be sure to consider
requirements for SnapView™ and MirrorView™ software if you
have this software. The following documents will help you with
this planning:
• EMC Storage Systems CX400-Series and CX600-Series
Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003113)
• EMC CLARiiON CX300, CX500, CX500i, and CX700 Storage
Systems Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 300-001-273)
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System Model FC4700-2
Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003087)
PowerPath Configurations for AIX
1-3
AIX Installation Checklists
Documentation
Each checklist refers to some or all of the documents listed below. We
recommend that you load these documents on your service laptop
before starting the installation.
◆
Documentation that ships with
• PCI HBA and native IBM HBA driver
• Switches and switch management software
• AIX operating system and HACMP (if using HACMP)
◆
Removing ATF or CDE Software Before Installing Other Failover
Software (P/N 069001173)
◆
PowerPath Version 4.3 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-673)
or
PowerPath Version 4.2 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-521)
or
PowerPath Version 3.0 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-047)
◆
PowerPath for AIX Version 4.3 Installation and Administration Guide
(P/N 300-000-683)
or
PowerPath for AIX Version 4.2 Installation and Administration Guide
(P/N 300-000-530)
or
PowerPath Version 3.0 for UNIX Installation and Administration
Guide (P/N 300-000-511)
◆
EMC CX-Series Server Software for AIX Installation Guide
(P/N 300-002-044)
or
EMC Navisphere Host Agent and CLI for AIX Version 6.X Installation
Guide (P/N 069001145)
1-4
◆
EMC Navisphere Command Line Interface (CLI) Version 6.X Reference
(P/N 069001038)
◆
EMC Storage-System Host Utilities for AIX Administrator’s Guide
(P/N 069001137)
◆
EMC Rails and Enclosures Field Installation Guide
(P/N 300-001-799)
◆
EMC Rails and Enclosures Installation Guide for 19-Inch NEMA
Cabinets (P/N 014003082) - for SPS installation only
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
AIX Installation Checklists
◆
EMC CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE) Setup Guide
(P/N 300-001-276, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-276, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2) CX400-Series Setup
and Cabling Guide (P/N 014003105) and EMC Storage Systems
CX400-Series and CX600-Series Initialization Guide
(P/N 014003112)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) CX600-Series Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 014003078) and EMC Storage Systems
CX400-Series and CX600-Series Initialization Guide
(P/N 014003112)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup
Guide (P/N 300-001-274, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-274), rev A01) and EMC CLARiiON
CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization Guide
(P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC CLARiiON 2-Gigabit Disk-Array Enclosure (DAE2) Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 014003104)
◆
FC4700-2 Setup Guide (P/N 0140373)
◆
EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001125)
◆
EMC Navisphere Security Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001124)
◆
EMC Host Connectivity Guide for IBM AIX (P/N 300-000-608)
PowerPath Configurations for AIX
1-5
AIX Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and New Storage System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be completed
before the service provider arrives.
Task
1
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install HBAs and
driver
Install HBAs.
Reference Document
HBA documentation
CAUTION Do not connect cables to the HBAs until you are told to do so
later in this procedure.
❑ Install HBA driver.
❑ Execute the following command:
AIX documentation
cfgmgr
2
3
4
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to the values required for CLARiiON and
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O delays.
Server
❑
Install EMC ODM
❑
Support
software
Server
Install Host
Agent or Server
Utility
Host connectivity guide
PowerPath.
Insert the AIX Utilities Kit CD and mount it.
AIX utilities
administrator’s guide
Install EMC ODM Support using SMIT or the command line.
• Note: The EMC ODM Support package is available on the ftp site
ftp://ftp.emc.com/pub/elab/aix/ODM_DEFINITIONS
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent or Navisphere Server Utility and the
Navisphere CLI.
CX-Series Server
Software for AIX
Installation Guide
❑ If you installed the Host Agent, edit the Navisphere Host Agent
configuration file agent.config file as follows:
• Add the following entry if it does not already exist:
device auto auto
• Add at least one privileged user.
5
1-6
Server
❑
Install admsnap
If the server will be a SnapView production or secondary host, install the
admsnap utility.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
CX-Series Server
Software for AIX
installation Guide
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
6
Server
Install
PowerPath
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Insert the PowerPath installation CD and mount it.
PowerPath Release
Notes and PowerPath
for UNIX installation and
administrator’s guide
❑ Install PowerPath using SMIT or from the command line.
❑ Register PowerPath.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches from the Software downloads page on the
EMC Powerlink website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
7
Switches
Install
For a SAN
❑ Install switches, if not already installed.
Rails, cabinet, and
switch documentation
❑ Connect a cable from each host HBA port to a switch port.
❑ On the server:
AIX documentation
• Download emc_cfgmgr.sh from ftp://ftp.emc.com/pub/elab/
powerpath/aix.
• Execute the following commands
cfgmgr
❑ Checkpoint - Verify the HBA connection to the switch by checking the
Switch documentation
LED(s) for the switch port connected to the HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
8
Storage System ❑ Install the storage system in the cabinet, if not already installed.
Install
Rails and cabinet
documentation
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and New Storage System
1-7
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
9
With Access Logix
Storage System ❑ Install the Navisphere Initialization Utility on a non-AIX host on the same
subnet as the storage-system management ports.
Initialize and
install software
❑ Use the Navisphere Initialization Utility to initialize the storage system.
enablers
❑ If you have SAN Copy, SnapView, and/or MirrorView software, install their
enablers.
10
Storage System ❑ Connect the storage system to the switch or HBA ports.
Cable
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the storage-system connections to the
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage-system setup
guide.
Switch documentation
switch by checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each SP
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the SP is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
❑ Cable each SP to the LAN connected to the hosts from which you will
manage the storage system.
11
Storage System ❑ Use Navisphere Manager to define a global administrator and domain (if
not already defined) and any additional users.
Set up security
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
12
Storage System ❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the storage system’s
default system type, failover mode, and array commpath values:
Set properties
for PowerPath
navicli -h hostname systemtype -config 3
Navisphere CLI
reference
navicli -h hostname failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the storage
system.
Note: Setting the array commpath property to 1 (enabled) creates LUNZ
devices.
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the storage
system.
1-8
Storage-system setup
guide.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
13
Switches
Zone
With Access Logix
Reference Document
For a SAN
Switch management
documentation
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each HBA port (host initiator) to
the appropriate SPs.
❑ If MirrorView is installed, create any required zones for it.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify the switch
connections to the storage system.
14
Server
❑ Execute the following AIX command:
emc_cfgmgr.sh
Make target SPs
available
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that AIX sees LUNZ devices with the following AIX
command:
lscfg | grep LUNZ
AIX documentation
If AIX does not see LUNZ devices
• Verify that arraycommpath is set to 1 as described in step 12.
• Execute the following AIX command:
emc_cfgmgr.sh
❑ Restart the Navisphere Host Agent or run the Navisphere Server Utility
with the following AIX commands:
Host Agent/
etc/rc.agent stop
/etc/rc.agent start
CX-Series Server
Software for AIX
Installation Guide
Server Utility
/usr/lpp/HOSTUTIL/naviserverutil
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere Manager’s Connectivity Status dialog box Navisphere Manager
to verify that each HBA is registered with the storage system.
❑ List the LUNZ devices with the following AIX command:
administrator’s guide
and online help
AIX documentation
lscfg | grep LUNZ
❑ Remove each LUNZ device with the following AIX command:
rmdev -dl hdiskn
where n is the hdisk number for the LUNZ device.
❑ Execute the following AIX command:
emc_cfgmg.sh
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and New Storage System
1-9
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
15
With Access Logix
Storage System ❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
Reference Document
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group
16
Storage System ❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
Set up Event
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
Monitor
your monitoring configuration.
17
Server
Configure
devices
❑ Download the following command from ftp://ftp.emc.com/pub/elab/
AIX documentation
powerpath/aix and execute it:
emc_cfgmgr.sh
❑ Execute the following PowerPath command:
powermt config
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that the server sees hdisk devices for the LUNs.
PowerPath product
guide
AIX documentation
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that PowerPath sees all the paths to the LUNs with the PowerPath product
following PowerPath command:
guide
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your PowerPath license key if you have one.
• Verify that the storage-system properties are as defined in step 12.
❑ Restart the Navisphere Host Agent or run the Navisphere Server Utility
with the following AIX commands:
Host Agent/
etc/rc.agent stop
/etc/rc.agent start
CX-Series Server
Software for AIX
Installation Guide
Server Utility
/usr/lpp/HOSTUTIL/naviserverutil
❑ Checkpoint if the Host Agent is installed - Use Navisphere Manager to
verify that the LUNs are mapped to hdiskpower devices.
1-10
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
18
19
With Access Logix
Reference Document
Serve
Make LUNs
available to AIX
❑ Create partitions or the pertinent database file systems on the LUNs.
Host connectivity guide
or AIX documentation
Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
If you have a PowerPath license key
If AIX does not recognize any LUNs, verify the connection to the Storage
Group.
AIX documentation
If your PowerPath license key is not registered, the load balancing policy is
restricted to basic failover.
❑ Stop all applications accessing the storage system and disable user logins
to the server.
❑ View the LUNs available to the server using the following PowerPath
command:
PowerPath product
guide
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is pseudo device that represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to LUN by viewing the output of the powermt
display dev=x every=2 command, and disconnect the cable to that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and
verify that
• The state of the uncabled paths becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining path(s) to the LUN, indicating that the
path failover was successful, and PowerPath is working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above steps exactly and caused any LUNs to
trespass, restore the LUNs to their original SP with the following PowerPath
command:
powermt restore
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and New Storage System
1-11
AIX Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and Existing Storage
System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be completed
before the service provider arrives.
Task
1
Server
Install HBAs and
driver
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install HBAs.
❑ Install HBAs.
HBA documentation
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
❑ Install HBA driver.
❑ Install HBA driver.
❑ Execute the following command:
❑ Execute the following command:
cfgmgr
2
3
1-12
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
AIX documentation
cfgmgr
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to ❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to Host connectivity guide
Server
❑
Install EMC ODM
Support software
the values required for CLARiiON
and PowerPath.
the values required for CLARiiON
and PowerPath.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
Insert the AIX Utilities Kit CD and ❑
mount it.
Insert the AIX Utilities Kit CD, and AIX utilities
mount it
administrator’s guide
❑ Install EMC ODM Support using
❑ Install EMC ODM Support using
SMIT or the command line.
SMIT or the command line.
Note: The EMC ODM Support
package is available on the ftp site
ftp://ftp.emc.com/pub/elab/aix/ODM_D
EFINITIONS
Note: The EMC ODM Support
package is available on the ftp site
ftp://ftp.emc.com/pub/elab/aix/ODM_D
EFINITIONS
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
4
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Insert the PowerPath installation
CD and mount it.
❑ Insert the PowerPath installation
❑ Install PowerPath using SMIT or
❑ Install PowerPath using SMIT or
PowerPath Release
Notes and PowerPath
for UNIX installation and
administrator’s guide
Server
❑
Install PowerPath
CD and mount it.
from the command line.
5
6
Server
Install Host
Agent or Server
Utility
Server
Install admsnap
from the command line
❑ Register PowerPath.
❑ Register PowerPath.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
http://powerlink.emc.com
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent ❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent CX-Series Server
or Navisphere Server Utility and
the Navisphere CLI.
or Navisphere Server Utility and
the Navisphere CLI.
❑ If you installed the Host Agent,
❑ If you installed the Host Agent,
edit the Navisphere Host Agent
configuration file agent.config
file as follows:
• Add the following entry if it
does not already exist:
device auto auto
edit the Navisphere Host Agent
configuration file agent.config
file as follows:
• Add the following entry if it
does not already exist:
device auto auto
• Add at least one privileged
user.
• Add at least one privileged
user.
❑ If the server will be a SnapView
production or secondary host,
install the admsnap utility.
N/A
Software for AIX
Installation Guide
CX-Series Server
Software for AIX
Installation Guide
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and Existing Storage System
1-13
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
7
Storage System
Update software
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ If the following software is
❑ If the following software is
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision,
update it:
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision,
update it:
• Access Logix
• Navisphere SP Agent
• Navisphere Storage
Management Server Software
• Navisphere Manager UI
• SAN Copy driver and UI
• SnapView driver and UI
• MirrorView driver and UI
• FLARE
• Navisphere SP Agent
• Navisphere Storage
Management Server Software
• Navisphere Manager UI
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or all paths to an SP are
down.
1-14
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or all paths to an SP are
down.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
8
With Access Logix
Storage System ❑
Set properties for
PowerPath
Without Access Logix
Use Navisphere Manager’s
❑
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the initiator type,
failover mode, and array
commpath properties for the
server’s HBA ports (initiators):
Use Navisphere Manager’s
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the initiator type,
failover mode, and array
commpath properties for the
server’s HBA ports (initiators):
Initiator Type to CLARiiON Open
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
Failover mode to 1
Array commpath to Enabled
navicli -h hostname
failovermode 1
Note: Setting the array
commpath property to 1
(enabled) creates LUNZ devices.
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
Reference Document
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
or
Navisphere CLI
reference
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
Note: Setting the array
commpath property to 1
(enabled) creates LUNZ devices.
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and Existing Storage System
1-15
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
9
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Cable to switches
or storage
system
Cable the HBA ports to the switch ❑
connected to the storage system
or to SP ports.
❑ Execute the following AIX
Switches
Zone
❑ Execute the following AIX
command:
cfgmgr
cfgmgr
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
the HBA connection to the switch
by checking the LED(s) for the
switch port connected to the HBA
port.
the HBA connection to the switch
by checking the LED(s) for the
switch port connected to the HBA
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA is logged in to the switch
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA is logged in to the switch
port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
For a SAN
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
path from each HBA port (host
initiator) to the appropriate SPs.
path from each HBA port (host
initiator) to the appropriate SPs.
❑ If MirrorView is installed, create
any required zones for it.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
1-16
Reference Document
Cable the HBA ports to the switch Storage-system setup
connected to the storage system guide.
or to SP ports.
command:
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
10
Without Access Logix
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
AIX documentation
Switch documentation
Switch management
documentation
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
11
Server
Make target SPs
available
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ On the server:
❑ On the server:
AIX documentation
• Download emc_cfgmgr.sh
from
ftp://ftp.emc.com/pub/elab/
powerpath/aix.
• Download emc_cfgmgr.sh
from
ftp://ftp.emc.com/pub/elab/
powerpath/aix.
• Execute the following
commands
• Execute the following
commands
cfgmgr
cfgmgr
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that each
HBA sees only the targets (SPs)
to which it is zoned with the
following AIX command:
lsdev -Cc array
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that each
HBA sees only the targets (SPs)
to which it is zoned with the
following AIX command:
lsdev -Cc array
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that AIX sees ❑ Checkpoint - Verify that AIX sees
LUNZ devices with the following
AIX command:
lscfg | grep LUNZ
LUNZ devices with the following
AIX command:
lscfg | grep LUNZ
If AIX does not see LUNZ devices
If AIX does not see LUNZ devices
• Verify that arraycommpath is
set to 1 as described in
step 12.
• Verify that arraycommpath is
set to 1 as described in
step 12.
• Execute the following AIX
command:
emc_cfgmgr.sh
• Execute the following AIX
command:
emc_cfgmgr.sh
❑ Restart the Navisphere Host
❑ Restart the Navisphere Host
Agent or run the Navisphere
Server Utility with the following
AIX commands:
Agent or run the Navisphere
Server Utility with the following
AIX commands:
Host Agent/
etc/rc.agent stop
/etc/rc.agent start
Host Agent/
etc/rc.agent stop
/etc/rc.agent start
Server Utility
/usr/lpp/HOSTUTIL/naviserverutil
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
Manager’s Connectivity Status
dialog box to verify that each HBA
is registered with the storage
system.
CX-Series Server
Software for AIX
Installation Guide
Server Utility
/usr/lpp/HOSTUTIL/naviserverutil
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
Navisphere Manager
Manager’s Connectivity Status administrator’s guide
dialog box to verify that each HBA and online help
is registered with the storage
system.
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and Existing Storage System
1-17
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
11
Server
Make target SPs
available (cont.)
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ List the LUNZ devices with the
❑ List the LUNZ devices with the
AIX documentation
following AIX command:
following AIX command:
lscfg | grep LUNZ
lscfg | grep LUNZ
❑ Remove each LUNZ device with
❑ Remove each LUNZ device with
the following AIX command:
the following AIX command:
rmdev -dl hdiskn
rmdev -dl hdiskn
where n is the hdisk number for
the LUNZ device.
where n is the hdisk number for
the LUNZ device.
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI ❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI Navisphere CLI
command to set the array
commpath property to 0:
command to set the array
commpath property to 0:
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 0
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 0
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
❑ Execute the following AIX
12
Storage System
Configure
❑ Execute the following AIX
command:
command:
cfgmgr
cfgmgr
❑ If the server will use an existing
N/A
reference
AIX documentation
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage Group, use Navisphere
Manager to connect the server to
the Storage Group.
❑ If the server will use a new
Storage Group, use Navisphere
Manager to create RAID Groups,
bind LUNs, create the Storage
Group, and assign LUNs to the
Storage Group.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
connect the server to the Storage
Group.
13
Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring
configuration.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set
user options, create templates,
and set up your monitoring
configuration.
1-18
❑ Plan your monitoring
configuration.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set
user options, create templates,
and set up your monitoring
configuration.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
14
Server
Configure
devices
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Execute the following command:
❑ Execute the following command:
AIX documentation
emc_cfgmgr.sh
emc_cfgmgr.sh
❑ Execute the following PowerPath ❑ Execute the following PowerPath PowerPath product
command:
command:
powermt config
powermt config
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that the
servers see hdisk devices for the
LUNs.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that the
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs with the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection
to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 8.
❑ Restart the Navisphere Host
PowerPath product
guide
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 8.
❑ Restart the Navisphere Host
Agent or run the Navisphere
Server Utility with the following
AIX commands:
Agent or run the Navisphere
Server Utility with the following
AIX commands:
Host Agent/
etc/rc.agent stop
/etc/rc.agent start
Host Agent/
etc/rc.agent stop
/etc/rc.agent start
Server Utility
/usr/lpp/HOSTUTIL/naviserverutil
AIX documentation
servers see hdisk devices for the
LUNs.
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs with the following
PowerPath command:
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
guide
CX-Series Server
Software for AIX
Installation Guide
Server Utility
/usr/lpp/HOSTUTIL/naviserverutil
❑ Checkpoint if the Host Agent is ❑ Checkpoint if the Host Agent is Navisphere Manager
installed - Use Navisphere
Manager to verify that the LUNs
are mapped to hdiskpower
devices.
installed - Use Navisphere
Manager to verify that the LUNs
are mapped to hdiskpower
devices.
administrator’s guide
and online help
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and Existing Storage System
1-19
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
15
With Access Logix
Server
Make LUNs
available to AIX
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Create partitions or the pertinent ❑ Create partitions or the pertinent Host connectivity guide
database file systems on the
LUNs.
database file systems on the
LUNs.
or AIX documentation
If AIX does not recognize any
LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
16
Server
If you have a PowerPath license key
Test PowerPath If your PowerPath license key is not
with a license key registered, the load balancing policy is
restricted to basic failover.
If your PowerPath license key is not
registered, the load balancing policy is
restricted to basic failover.
❑ Stop all applications accessing
❑ Stop all applications accessing
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
❑ View the LUNs available to the
❑ View the LUNs available to the
server using the following
PowerPath command:
server using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to
❑ Choose one available LUN to
receive I/O for the test.
receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen
❑ View the paths to the chosen
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
where x is pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
1-20
If you have a PowerPath license key AIX documentation
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
PowerPath product
guide
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
16
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Test PowerPath
with a license key
(cont.)
View the output of the powermt
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ View the output of the powermt
PowerPath product
guide
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
• The state of the uncabled
paths becomes “dead.”
• The state of the uncabled
paths becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original state with
the following PowerPath
command:
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original state with
the following PowerPath
command:
powermt restore
powermt restore
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — New AIX Server and Existing Storage System
1-21
AIX Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and New Storage
System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be performed
before the service provider arrives, except for the removal of
Application Transparent Failover (ATF) or CDE, which you can have
done by EMC Professional Services.
!
CAUTION
EMC no longer supports ATF or CDE. Before you transition your
server from ATF or CDE to PowerPath, you must
◆
Back up your server configurations.
◆
Back up data on all storage systems connected to the server.
◆
Remove ATF or CDE, which EMC recommends that EMC
Professional Services do, especially if your server configuration
is complex. If you want to remove it yourself, you must use the
procedure in the Removing ATF or CDE Software Before
Installing Other Failover Software document (P/N 069001173),
which is on the Powerlink website with this roadmap.
Simply removing ATF or CDE using the uninstall procedure in
the AIX ATF administrator’s guide or the AIX utilities
administrator’s guide may not return the server to it original
state, and may result in lost data.
1-22
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
1
2
3
4
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Unmount file
❑
systems and vary
off volumes
Unmount any file systems that reside on the storage system.
Reference Document
AIX documentation
Vary off any volume groups that reside on the storage systems.
Server
If the CLARiiON HBA driver is installed
Replace
CLARiiON HBA
driver
❑ Remove the hdisk devices for LUNs in the storage system.
AIX documentation
❑ Replace it with the IBM HBA driver.
HBA driver
documentation
Server
Remove ATF or
CDE
❑ If ATF or CDE is installed, then before continuing either remove it yourself Removing ATF or CDE
(see caution before this checklist) or arrange to have EMC Professional
Services remove it.
Server
❑
Install EMC ODM
Support software
Remove the DiskArray software,.
CAUTION Do not reboot the server.
AIX utilities
administrator’s guide
❑ Disconnect any non-FC4700 or non-CX-Series storage systems.
PowerPath does not support these storage systems.
❑ Insert the AIX Utilities Kit CD and mount it.
❑ Install EMC ODM Support using SMIT or ODM or the command line.
Note: The EMC ODM Support package is available on the ftp site
ftp://ftp.emc.com/pub/elab/aix/ODM_DEFINITIONS
❑ Reboot the server.
5
Server
Replace IBM
HBAs and/or
Install additional
HBAs
Note: PowerPath requires IBM PCI HBAs and the driver supported by IBM for
AIX.
HBA documentation
❑ If the server has IBM HBAs connected to the storage system, replace them
with the IBM HBAs.
❑ If you need additional HBAs to provide more paths to the storage system,
install these HBAs.
CAUTION Do not connect cables to the HBAs until you are told to do so
later in this procedure.
6
Server
Update Software
❑ If the following software is currently installed and not at the required
minimum revision, update it:
• HBA driver
• Navisphere Host Agent and CLI
HBA driver
documentation
CX-Series Server
Software for AIX
installation Guide
• admsnap
❑ Execute the following command:
AIX documentation
cfgmgr
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and New Storage System
1-23
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
7
8
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Make sure the HBA driver parameters are set to the values required for
Host connectivity guide
CLARiiON and PowerPath.
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O delays.
Server
❑
Install PowerPath ❑
Insert the PowerPath installation CD and mount it.
Install PowerPath from the command line or using SMIT.
PowerPath Release
Notes and PowerPath
for UNIX installation and
administrator’s guide
❑ Register PowerPath.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches from the Software downloads page on the
EMC Powerlink website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
9
Storage System
Install
10 Storage System
Initialize and
install software
enablers
❑ Install the storage system in the cabinet, if not already installed.
Rails and cabinet
documentation
❑ Install the Navisphere Initialization Utility on a non-AIX host on the same
Storage-system setup
guide
subnet as the storage-system management ports.
❑ Use the Navisphere Initialization Utility to initialize the storage system.
❑ If you have SAN Copy, SnapView, and/or MirrorView software, install their Navisphere Manager
enablers.
11 Storage System
Cable to switch
or server and
LAN
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Connect the storage system to the switch or HBA ports.
Storage-system setup
guide.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the storage-system connections to the
Switch documentation
switch by checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each SP
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the SP is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
❑ Cable each SP to the LAN connected to the hosts from which you will
manage the storage system.
1-24
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Storage-system setup
guide.
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
12 Storage System
Set up security
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to define a global administrator and domain (if
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
not already defined) and any additional users.
13 Storage System ❑
Set properties for
PowerPath
Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the storage system’s,
and array commpath properties:
Navisphere CLI
reference
navicli -h hostname systemtype -config 3
navicli -h hostname failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the
storage system.
Note: Setting the array commpath property to 1 (enabled) creates LUNZ
devices.
14 Server
❑
Cable additional
or replacement
❑
HBAs to switches
or storage
system
❑
Cable any additional or replacement HBA ports to the switch connected to Storage-system setup
the storage system or to SP ports.
guide.
Execute the following AIX command:
AIX documentation
cfgmgr
Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the HBA connections to the switch by
checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each additional HBA
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA port is
logged in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
Switch documentation
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
15 Switches
Zone
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each new HBA port (host
Switch management
documentation
initiator) to the appropriate SPs.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify the switch
connections to the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and New Storage System
1-25
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
16 Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Download the following command from ftp://ftp.emc.com/pub/elab/
AIX documentation
powerpath/aix and execute it:
emc_cfgmgr.sh
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that AIX sees LUNZ devices with the following AIX
command:
lscfg | grep LUNZ
If AIX does not see LUNZ devices
• Verify that arraycommpath is set to 1 as described in step 12.
• Execute the following AIX command:
emc_cfgmgr.sh
❑ Restart the Navisphere Host Agent or run the Navisphere Server Utility
with the following AIX commands:
Host Agent/
etc/rc.agent stop
/etc/rc.agent start
CX-Series Server
Software for AIX
installation guide
Server Utility
/usr/lpp/HOSTUTIL/naviserverutil
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere Manager’s Connectivity Status dialog box Navisphere Manager
to verify that each HBA is registered with the storage system.
❑ List the LUNZ devices with the following AIX command:
administrator’s guide
and online help
AIX documentation
lscfg | grep LUNZ
❑ Remove each LUNZ device with the following AIX command:
rmdev -dl hdiskn
where n is the hdisk number for the LUNZ device.
17 Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group
18 Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
1-26
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
❑
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
your monitoring configuration.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
19 Server
Configure
devices
❑ Execute the following command:
AIX documentation
emc_cfgmgr.sh
❑ Execute the following PowerPath command:
powermt config
PowerPath product
guide
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that the server sees hdiskpower devices for the
LUNs.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that PowerPath sees all the paths to the LUNs with the
following PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your PowerPath license key if you have one.
• Verify that the storage-system properties are as defined in step 13.
❑ Restart the Navisphere Host Agent or run the Navisphere Server Utility
with the following AIX commands:
Host Agent/
etc/rc.agent stop
/etc/rc.agent start
CX-Series Server
Software for AIX
installation guide
Server Utility
/usr/lpp/HOSTUTIL/naviserverutil
❑ Checkpoint if the Host Agent is installed - Use Navisphere Manager to Navisphere Manager
verify that the LUNs are mapped to hdiskpower devices.
20 Server
Make LUNs
available to AIX
❑ Create partitions or the pertinent database file systems on the LUNs.
If AIX does not recognize any LUNs, verify the connection to the Storage
Group.
administrator’s guide
and online help
Host connectivity guide
or AIX documentation
21 Server
If you have a PowerPath license key
PowerPath product
Test PowerPath Note If your PowerPath license key is not registered, the load balancing policy is guide
with a license key restricted to basic failover.
❑ View the LUNs available to the server using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is pseudo device that represents the chosen LUN.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and New Storage System
1-27
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
21 Server
❑
Test PowerPath ❑
with a license key
(cont.)
Reference Document
Start I/O to the LUN.
Identify the HBA sending I/O to LUN by viewing the output of the powermt
display dev=x every=2 command, and disconnect the cable to that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and
verify that
• The state of the uncabled path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining path(s) to the LUN, indicating that the
path failover was successful, and PowerPath is working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the previous steps exactly and caused any LUNs to
trespass, restore the LUNs to their original state with the following
PowerPath command:
PowerPath product
guide
powermt restore
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
1-28
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
AIX Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and Existing Storage
System
This checklist assumes that the existing AIX server and existing
storage system are already connected in a SAN or direct attach
configuration. Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be
performed before the service provider arrives, except for the removal
of ATF or CDE, which you can have done by EMC Professional
Services.
!
CAUTION
EMC no longer supports ATF or CDE. Before you transition your
server from ATF or CDE to PowerPath, you must
◆
Back up your server configurations.
◆
Back up data on all storage systems connected to the server.
◆
Remove ATF or CDE, which EMC recommends that EMC
Professional Services do, especially if your server configuration
is complex. If you want to remove it yourself, you must use the
procedure in the Removing ATF or CDE Software Before
Installing Other Failover Software document (P/N 069001173),
which is on the Powerlink website with this roadmap.
Simply removing ATF or CDE using the uninstall procedure in
the AIX ATF administrator’s guide or the AIX utilities
administrator’s guide may not return the server to it original
state, and may result in lost data.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and Existing Storage System
1-29
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
1
2
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Unmount file
systems and vary
❑
off volumes
Server
Replace
CLARiiON HBA
driver
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Unmount any file systems that
reside on the storage system.
❑ Unmount any file systems that
AIX documentation
Vary off any volume groups that
reside on the storage systems.
❑ Vary off any volume groups that
reside on the storage system.
reside on the storage systems.
If the CLARiiON HBA driver is
installed
If the CLARiiON HBA driver is
installed
❑ Remove the hdisk devices for
❑ Remove the hdisk devices for
LUNs in the storage system.
❑ Remove CLArray or
❑ Remove CLArray or
CLARiiON.fcp.
CLARiiON.fcp.
❑ Install the IBM HBA driver.
❑ Replace it with the IBM HBA
driver
3
4
Server
Remove ATF or
CDE
❑ If ATF or CDE is installed, then
before continuing either remove it
yourself (see caution before this
checklist) or arrange to have EMC
Professional Services remove it.
Server
❑
Install EMC ODM
Support software
Remove the DiskArray software.
CAUTION Do not reboot the
server.
❑ Disconnect any non-FC4700 or
❑ If ATF or CDE is installed, then
❑ Remove the DiskArray software.
CAUTION Do not reboot the
server.
❑ Disconnect any non-FC4700 or
non-CX-Series storage systems.
PowerPath does not support
these storage systems.
PowerPath does not support
these storage systems.
❑ Insert the AIX Utilities Kit CD and ❑ Insert the AIX Utilities Kit CD and
❑ Install ODM using SMIT or ODM
or the command line.
1-30
HBA driver
documentation
Removing ATF or CDE
before continuing either remove it
yourself (see caution before this
checklist) or arrange to have EMC
Professional Services remove it.
non-CX-Series storage systems.
mount it.
AIX documentation
LUNs in the storage system.
mount it.
❑ Install ODM using SMIT or ODM
or the command line.
Note: The EMC ODM Support
package is available on the ftp site
ftp://ftp.emc.com/pub/elab/aix/ODM_D
EFINITIONS
Note: The EMC ODM Support
package is available on the ftp site
ftp://ftp.emc.com/pub/elab/aix/ODM_D
EFINITIONS
❑ Reboot the server.
❑ Reboot the server.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
AIX utilities
administrator’s guide
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
5
With Access Logix
Server
Replace IBM
HBAs and/or
Install additional
HBAs
Server
Update Software
Reference Document
Note: PowerPath requires IBM PCI
Note: PowerPath requires IBM PCI
HBA documentation
HBAs and the driver supported by IBM HBAs and the driver supported by IBM
for AIX.
for AIX.
❑ If the server has IBM HBAs
connected to the storage system,
replace them with the IBM HBAs.
❑ If you need additional HBAs to
6
Without Access Logix
❑ If the server has IBM HBAs
connected to the storage system,
replace them with the IBM HBAs.
❑ If you need additional HBAs to
provide more paths to the storage
system, install these HBAs.
provide more paths to the storage
system, install these HBAs.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure
❑ If the following software is
❑ If the following software is
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision,
update it:
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision,
update it:
• HBA driver
• HBA driver
• Navisphere Host Agent
• Navisphere Host Agent
HBA driver
documentation
CX-Series Server
Software for AIX
Installation Guide
• admsnap
❑ Execute the following command:
cfgmgr
7
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
❑ Execute the following command:
AIX documentation
cfgmgr
❑ Make sure the HBA driver
❑ Make sure the HBA driver
parameters are set to the values
required for CLARiiON and
PowerPath.
parameters are set to the values
required for CLARiiON and
PowerPath.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
Host connectivity guide
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and Existing Storage System
1-31
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
8
Storage System
Update software
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ If the following software is
❑ If the following software is
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision,
update it:
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision,
update it:
• Access Logix
• Navisphere SP Agent
• Navisphere Storage
Management Server Software
• Navisphere Manager UI
• SAN Copy driver and UI
• SnapView driver and UI
• MirrorView driver and UI
• FLARE
• Navisphere SP Agent
• Navisphere Storage
Management Server Software
• Navisphere Manager UI
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or all paths to an SP are
down.
1-32
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or all paths to an SP are
down.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
9
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Storage System For new or replacement HBAs
For any HBAs
Navisphere CLI
Set properties for ❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI ❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI reference
PowerPath
command to determine the
command to determine the
default storage-system type:
default storage-system type:
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
navicli -h hostname systemtype
commands to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s new or replacement HBA
ports (initiators):
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
navicli -h hostname
storagegroup -sethost
-host servername
-type 3
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set it
to 3:
navicli -h hostname
storagegroup -sethost
-host servername
-failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
storagegroup -setpath
-host servername
-arraycommpath 1
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
where
hostname is the IP address or
network name of an SP in the
storage system
servername is the server’s name
or network address
Note: Setting the array
commpath property to 1
(enabled) creates LUNZ devices.
You will have to remove the LUNZ
devices later in the procedure.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and Existing Storage System
1-33
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
9
With Access Logix
Storage System
Set properties for
PowerPath (cont.)
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
For any HBAs (cont.)
Navisphere CLI
reference
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the storage
system’s default failover mode
and array commpath properties:
navicli -h hostname
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
Note: Setting the array
commpath property to 1
(enabled) creates LUNZ devices.
You will have to remove the LUNZ
devices later in the procedure.
For existing HBAs
❑ Use Navisphere Manager’s
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the storage
system’s initiator type, failover
mode, and array commpath
properties for the server’s HBA
ports (initiators):
Initiator Type to CLARiiON Open
Failover mode to 1
Array commpath to Enabled
Note: Setting the array
commpath property to 1
(enabled) creates LUNZ devices.
You will have to remove the LUNZ
devices later in the procedure.
1-34
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
10 Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Insert the PowerPath installation
CD and mount it.
❑ Install PowerPath from the
command line or using SMIT.
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Insert the PowerPath installation
PowerPath Release
Notes and PowerPath
for UNIX installation and
administrator’s guide
CD and mount it.
❑ Install PowerPath from the
command line or using SMIT.
❑ Register PowerPath.
❑ Register PowerPath.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
http://powerlink.emc.com
11 Server
❑
Cable additional
or replacement
HBAs to switches
or storage
❑
system
Cable any additional or
replacement HBA ports to the
switch connected to the storage
system or to SP ports.
❑ Cable any additional or
Execute the following AIX
command:
❑ Execute the following AIX
cfgmgr
replacement HBA ports to the
switch connected to the storage
system or to SP ports.
Storage-system setup
guide.
AIX documentation
command:
cfgmgr
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
the HBA connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for
the switch port connected to each
additional HBA port.
Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
Switch documentation
the HBA connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for
the switch port connected to each
additional HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and Existing Storage System
1-35
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
11 Server
Cable additional
or replacement
HBAs to switches
or storage
system (cont.)
12 Switches
Zone for
additional HBAs
With Access Logix
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
For a SAN
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
path from each additional HBA
port (host initiator) to the
appropriate SPs.
path from each additional HBA
port (host initiator) to the
appropriate SPs.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
13 Server
Make target SPs
available
Without Access Logix
Switch management
documentation
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system
❑ Download the following command ❑ Download the following command AIX documentation
from ftp://ftp.emc.com/pub/elab/
powerpath/aix and execute it:
from ftp://ftp.emc.com/pub/elab/
powerpath/aix and execute it:
emc_cfgmgr.sh
emc_cfgmgr.sh
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that AIX sees ❑ Checkpoint - Verify that AIX sees
1-36
Reference Document
LUNZ devices with the following
AIX command:
lscfg | grep LUNZ
LUNZ devices with the following
AIX command:
lscfg | grep LUNZ
If AIX does not see LUNZ devices
If AIX does not see LUNZ devices
• Verify that arraycommpath is
set to 1 as described in step 9.
• Verify that arraycommpath is
set to 1 as described in step 9.
• Execute the following AIX
command:
emc_cfgmgr.sh
• Execute the following AIX
command:
emc_cfgmgr.sh
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
13 Server
Make target SPs
available (cont.)
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that each
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that each
AIX documentation
HBA sees only the targets (SPs)
to which it is zoned with the
following AIX command:
HBA sees only the targets (SPs)
to which it is zoned with the
following AIX command:
lsdev -Cc array
lsdev -Cc array
❑ Restart the Navisphere Host
❑ Restart the Navisphere Host
Agent or run the Navisphere
Server Utility with the following
AIX commands:
Agent or run the Navisphere
Server Utility with the following
AIX commands:
Host Agent/
etc/rc.agent stop
/etc/rc.agent start
Host Agent/
etc/rc.agent stop
/etc/rc.agent start
Server Utility
/usr/lpp/HOSTUTIL/naviserverutil
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
Manager’s Connectivity Status
dialog box to verify that each HBA
is registered with the storage
system.
Server Utility
/usr/lpp/HOSTUTIL/naviserverutil
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
Navisphere Manager
Manager’s Connectivity Status administrator’s guide
dialog box to verify that each HBA and online help
is registered with the storage
system.
❑ List the LUNZ devices with the
❑ List the LUNZ devices with the
following AIX command:
following AIX command:
lscfg | grep LUNZ
lscfg | grep LUNZ
❑ Remove each LUNZ device with
❑ Remove each LUNZ device with
the following AIX command:
the following AIX command:
rmdev -dl hdiskn
rmdev -dl hdiskn
where n is the hdisk number for
the LUNZ device.
where n is the hdisk number for
the LUNZ device.
❑ Execute the following AIX
CX-Series Server
Software for AIX
installation guide
AIX documentation
❑ Execute the following AIX
command:
command:
emc_cfgmg.sh
emc_cfgmg.sh
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and Existing Storage System
1-37
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
14 Server
Configure
devices
❑ If you replaced HBAs or added
Without Access Logix
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
additional HBAs, use Navisphere
Manager to disconnect and then
reconnect the server and its
Storage Group.
❑ Execute the following command:
emc_cfgmgr.sh
Reference Document
❑ Execute the following command:
AIX documentation
emc_cfgmgr.sh
❑ Execute the following PowerPath ❑ Execute the following PowerPath PowerPath product
command:
command:
powermt config
powermt config
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that the
server sees hdiskpower devices
for the LUNs.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
server sees hdiskpower devices
for the LUNs.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs with the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection
to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 9.
1-38
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that the
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs with the following
PowerPath command:
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
guide
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 9.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
PowerPath product
guide
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
14 Server
Configure
devices (cont.)
❑ Restart the Navisphere Host
❑ Restart the Navisphere Host
CX-Series Server
Software for AIX
installation guide
Agent or run the Navisphere
Server Utility with the following
AIX commands:
Agent or run the Navisphere
Server Utility with the following
AIX commands:
Host Agent/
etc/rc.agent stop
/etc/rc.agent start
Host Agent/
etc/rc.agent stop
/etc/rc.agent start
Server Utility
/usr/lpp/HOSTUTIL/naviserverutil
Server Utility
/usr/lpp/HOSTUTIL/naviserverutil
❑ Checkpoint if the Host Agent is ❑ Checkpoint if the Host Agent is Navisphere Manager
Installed - Use Navisphere
Manager to verify that the LUNs
are mapped to hdiskpower
devices.
15 Server
If you have a PowerPath license key
Test PowerPath Note If your PowerPath license key is
with a license key not registered, the load balancing
policy is restricted to basic failover.
installed - Use Navisphere
Manager to verify that the LUNs
are mapped to hdiskpower
devices.
If you have a PowerPath license key PowerPath product
guide
Note If your PowerPath license key is
not registered, the load balancing
policy is restricted to basic failover.
❑ Stop all applications accessing
❑ Stop all applications accessing
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
❑ View the LUNs available to the
❑ View the LUNs available to the
server using the following
PowerPath command:
server using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to
❑ Choose one available LUN to
receive I/O for the test.
receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen
❑ View the paths to the chosen
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
where x is pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing AIX Server and Existing Storage System
1-39
AIX Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
15 Server
❑
Test PowerPath
with a license key
(cont.)
Without Access Logix
Identify the HBA sending I/O to
❑
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
Identify the HBA sending I/O to
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt
❑ View the output of the powermt
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
Reference Document
PowerPath product
guide
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the previous
❑ If you did not follow the previous
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
powermt restore
powermt restore
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
1-40
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
2
Invisible Body Tag
HP-UX Installation
Checklist
This chapter contains a checklist of the tasks required to install
CLARiiON storage in a configuration with PowerPath, VERITAS
DMP, or with no EMC failover software.
Topics are
◆
◆
◆
PowerPath Configurations for HP-UX ...........................................2-2
DMP Configurations for HP-UX....................................................2-45
Configurations for HP-UX Without EMC Failover Software ....2-53
HP-UX Installation Checklist
2-1
HP-UX Installation Checklist
PowerPath Configurations for HP-UX
Read this section if you are installing an HP-UX® PowerPath™
configuration with a new or existing server and a new or existing
storage system. A new and existing server and a new and existing
storage system are defined as follows:
new server - A server running HP-UX and not connected to any
storage system.
existing server - A server running HP-UX that is already connected
to one or more storage systems.
new storage system - A CX300, CX500, or CX700 storage system that
has the factory default settings and has never been connected to a
server.
existing storage system - A CX300, CX400, CX500, CX600, CX700,
FC4500, or FC4700-Series storage system that is already connected to
one or more servers and is in an EMC Navisphere® domain.
All CLARiiON storage systems connected to the server must be CX300,
CX400, CX500, CX600, CX700, FC4500, or FC4700-Series storage
systems. If any other type of CLARiiON storage system is connected to the
server, the server cannot run PowerPath.
Topics relating to the checklists for HP-UX PowerPath configurations
are
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
2-2
Required Host Software Revisions.................................................. 2-3
Prerequisites ....................................................................................... 2-3
Documentation................................................................................... 2-4
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and New Storage
System.................................................................................................. 2-7
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and Existing Storage
System................................................................................................ 2-13
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and New Storage
System................................................................................................ 2-26
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and Existing
Storage System ................................................................................. 2-33
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Required Host
Software Revisions
◆
HP-UX operating system revision listed in the EMC Support
Matrix on the Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
HBA driver revision listed in the EMC Support Matrix on the
Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
HP-UX PowerPath
• For CX300, CX400, CX600, C4500, and FC4700-Series storage
systems
Version 3.0.2 or higher
• For CX500 and CX700 storage systems
Version 3.0.3 or higher
Refer to the EMC Support Matrix and the EMC PowerPath for UNIX Release
Notes on the Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com) for the
specific revision required for your HP-UX version.
Prerequisites
◆
You must have a host that is
• Running an operating system that can support the Navisphere
Manager 6.X browser-based client. For an up-to-date list of
such operating systems, refer to the Navisphere Manager 6.X
release notes on http://powerlink.emc.com.
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system server
and that you will connect to the SPs in CX300, CX400, CX600,
or FC4700-Series storage systems.
◆
For most configurations, you must also have a host that is
• Running Navisphere CLI version 6.X.
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system server
and that you will connect to SPs in CX300, CX400, CX600, or
FC4700-Series storage systems.
PowerPath Configurations for HP-UX
2-3
HP-UX Installation Checklist
◆
You must have planned your LUNs and RAID Groups, and
Storage Groups if you have Access Logix. Be sure to consider
requirements for SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and
MirrorView/A if you have this software. The following
documents will help you with this planning:
• EMC CLARiiON CX300, CX500, CX500i, and CX700 Storage
Systems Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 300-001-273)
• EMC CX400-Series and CX600-Series Storage Systems
Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003113)
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System Model FC4700-2
Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003087)
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System Model FC4700 Configuration
Planning Guide (P/N 014003016)
Documentation
This checklist refers to some or all of the documents listed below. We
recommend that you load these documents on your service laptop
before starting the installation.
◆
Documentation that ships with
• HBA and HBA driver
• Switches and switch management software
• HP-UX operating system
◆
PowerPath Version 4.3 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-673)
or
PowerPath Version 4.2 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-521)
or
PowerPath Version 4.1 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-290)
or
PowerPath Version 3.0 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-047)
◆
PowerPath for HP-UX Version 4.3 Installation and Administration
Guide (P/N 300-001-682)
or
PowerPath for HP-UX Version 4.2 Installation and Administration
Guide (P/N 300-001-529)
or
PowerPath Version 4.1 for HP-UX Installation and Administration
Guide (P/N 300-001-297)
or
2-4
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
PowerPath Version 3.0 for UNIX Installation and Administration
Guide (P/N 300-000-511)
◆
EMC PowerPath Version 4.1 Quick Reference (P/N) 300-001-204)
◆
EMC Navisphere Host Agent and CLI for HP-UX Version 6.X
Installation Guide (P/N 069001146)
or
EMC CX-Series Server Software for HP-UX Installation Guide
(P/N300-002-043)
◆
EMC SnapView Installation Guide (P/N 069001193, revision A02 or
higher)
◆
EMC SAN Copy Installation Guide (P/N 069001187)
◆
EMC Navisphere Command Line Interface (CLI) Reference
(P/N 069001038)
◆
EMC Rails and Enclosures Field Installation Guide
(P/N 300-001-799)
◆
EMC Rails and Enclosures Installation Guide for 19-Inch NEMA
Cabinets (P/N 014003082) - for SPS installation only
◆
EMC CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE) Setup Guide
(P/N 300-001-276, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-276, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2) CX400-Series Setup
and Cabling Guide (P/N 014003105) and EMC Storage Systems
CX400-Series and CX600-Series Initialization Guide
(P/N 014003112)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
PowerPath Configurations for HP-UX
2-5
HP-UX Installation Checklist
◆
EMC Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) CX600-Series Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 014003078) and EMC Storage Systems
CX400-Series and CX600-Series Initialization Guide
(P/N 014003112)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup
Guide (P/N 300-001-274, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-274), rev A01) and EMC CLARiiON
CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization Guide
(P/N 300-001-272)
2-6
◆
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk -Array Enclosure (DAE2) Setup and Cabling
Guide (P/N 014003104)
◆
FC4500 Setup Guide (P/N 014003102, revision A03 or higher)
◆
FC4700-2 Setup Guide (P/N 0140373)
◆
EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001125)
◆
EMC Navisphere Security Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001124)
◆
EMC Host Connectivity Guide for HP-UX (P/N 300-000-614)
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and New Storage
System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be completed
before the service provider arrives
Task
1
Server
Install HBAs,
drivers, cables
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install the HBAs.
HBA documentation
❑ Connect a cable from each host HBA port to a switch port or an SP port.
❑ Install the HBA driver.
2
3
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to the values required for CLARiiON.
❑ Reboot the server to complete the installation of the drivers.
Server
❑
Install Host Agent
Install the Navisphere Host Agent and CLI.
Host connectivity
guide and HBA
documentation
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
❑ Modify user login scripts.
❑ Edit the Navisphere Host Agent configuration file agent.config file as
follows:
• Add the following entry if it does not already exist:
device auto auto
• Add at least one privileged user.
❑ Continue to edit the Navisphere Host Agent configuration file agent.config CX-Series Server
file as follows:
• Comment the OptionsSupported Autotrespass entry as follows:
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
# OptionsSupported Autotrespass
The above entry will set the initiator type for the HBAs to no auto
trespass when they register with the storage system:
• Edit any other entries as desired.
4
Server
Install admsnap
❑ If the server will be a SnapView production or secondary host, install the
admsnap utility.
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and New Storage System
2-7
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
5
Server
Install PowerPath
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Insert the PowerPath installation CD and mount it.
PowerPath Release
Notes and PowerPath
for UNIX installation
and administrator’s
guide
❑ Install PowerPath.
❑ Register PowerPath.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches from the Software downloads page on the
EMC Powerlink website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
6
Switches
Install
For a SAN
❑ Install switches, if not already installed.
Rails, cabinet, and
switch documentation
❑ Connect a cable from each host HBA port to a switch port.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify the HBA connection to the switch by checking the
Switch documentation
LED(s) for the switch port connected to the HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
7
Storage System
Install
❑ Install the storage system in the cabinet, if not already installed.
Rails and cabinet
documentation
8
Storage System
Initialize and
install software
enablers
❑ Install the Navisphere Initialization Utility on a host on the same subnet as
Storage-system setup
guide
the storage-system management ports.
❑ Use the Navisphere Initialization Utility to initialize the storage system.
❑ If you have SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and/or MirrorView/A
software, install the enabler for them.
2-8
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
9
With Access Logix
Storage System
❑
Cable to switch or
❑
server and LAN
Connect the storage system to the switch or HBA ports.
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide
Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the storage-system connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each SP
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the SP is logged in
to the switch port
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
❑ Cable each SP to the LAN connected to the hosts from which you will
manage the storage system.
10 Storage System
Set up security
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to define a global administrator and domain (if
not already defined) and any additional users.
❑
11 Storage System
Set properties for
PowerPath
Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the storage-system
properties:
Storage-system setup
guide
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
Navisphere CLI
reference
navicli -h hostname failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the storage
system.
12 Switches
Zone
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each host initiator to an SP.
Switch management
documentation
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify the switch
connections to the storage system.
13 Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Make sure that each HBA sees only the targets (SPs) to which it is zoned
HP-UX documentation
with the following HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
❑ Verify that HP-UX sees device entries for all LUNS with the following
HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and New Storage System
2-9
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
13 Server
Make target SPs
available (cont.)
❑ Log in as root and restart the Navisphere Host Agent with the following
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
HP-UX commands:
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
❑ Make sure again that each HBA sees only the targets (SPs) to which it is
HP-UX documentation
zoned with the following HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
❑ Reverify that HP-UX sees device entries for all LUNS with the following
HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
14 Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group.
15 Server
❑
Make LUNs visible
Log in as root and restart the Navisphere Host Agent with the following
HP-UX commands:
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that HP-UX can recognize these LUNs with the
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
HP-UX documentation
following HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
ioscan -fnC disk
If HP-UX does not recognize any LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
16 Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
2-10
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
❑
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
your monitoring configuration.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
17 Server
Configure
PowerPath
devices
❑ Use the following PowerPath command to configure PowerPath:
PowerPath product
guide
powermt config
❑ Checkpoint - Use the following PowerPath command to verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to the LUNs:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
If PowerPath cannot see all the paths, verify that
• you registered your PowerPath license key if you have one
• the OptionsSupported Autotrespass entry is defined as described in
step 3
• the storage-system properties are set as defined in step 11.
❑ If PowerPath can see all the path to the LUNs, save the PowerPath
configuration with the following command:
powermt save
The PowerPath configuration is saved in the following file:
/etc/powermt.custom
18 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
If you have a PowerPath license key
Note If your PowerPath license key is not registered, the load balancing policy is
restricted to basic failover.
PowerPath product
guide
❑ Stop all applications accessing the storage system and disable user logins
to the server.
❑ View the LUNs available to the server using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a device that represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to LUN by viewing the output of the powermt
display dev=x every=2 command, and disconnect the cable to that HBA.
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and New Storage System
2-11
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
18 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key (cont.)
❑ View the output of the powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and
Reference Document
verify that
• The state of the uncabled paths becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining path(s) to the LUN, indicating that the
path failover was successful, and PowerPath is working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above steps exactly and caused any LUNs to
trespass, restore the LUNs to their original SP with the following PowerPath
command:
powermt restore
19 Server
❑
Make LUNs
available to HP-UX
Prepare the LUNs to receive data using the Logical Volume Manager
(LVM).
If HP-UX does not recognize any LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
Host connectivity
guide and HP-UX
documentation
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
2-12
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and Existing Storage
System
Complete the tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist before the
service provider arrives
The Without Access Logix column does not apply to CX300, CX500, and
CX700 storage systems because they ship from the factory with the Access
Logix enabler installed.
Task
1
Server
Install HBAs,
drivers, cables
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install the HBAs.
❑ Install the HBAs.
HBA documentation
❑ Connect a cable from each host
❑ Connect a cable from each host
HBA port to a switch port or an SP
port.
❑ Install the HBA driver.
2
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
HBA port to a switch port or an SP
port.
❑ Install the HBA driver.
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to ❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to Host connectivity guide
the values required for CLARiiON.
❑ Reboot the server to complete the ❑
installation of the drivers.
3
Server
❑
Install Host Agent
Install the Navisphere Host Agent ❑
and CLI.
❑ Modify user login scripts.
❑
the values required for CLARiiON. and HBA
documentation
Reboot the server to complete the
installation of the drivers.
Install the Navisphere Host Agent CX-Series Server
and CLI.
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
Modify user login scripts.
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and Existing Storage System
2-13
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
3
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install Host Agent
(cont.)
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Edit the Navisphere Host Agent
❑
configuration file agent.config file
as follows:
• Add the following entry if it
does not already exist:
device auto auto
Edit the Navisphere Host Agent
CX-Series Server
configuration file agent.config file Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
as follows:
• Add the following entry if it
does not already exist:
device auto auto
• Add at least one privileged
user.
• Add at least one privileged
user.
• For FC4500 storage systems, if
you know the IP addresses of
the portal storage-system SPs,
add an entry with the following
format for each SP to the
agent.config file:
• For FC4500 storage systems, if
you know the IP addresses of
the portal storage-system SPs,
add an entry with the following
format for each SP to the
agent.config file:
system@SP_ip_address
system@SP_ip_address
where SP_ip_address is the
address of the SP.
where SP_ip_address is the
address of the SP.
❑ Continue to edit the Navisphere
❑ Continue to edit other entries in
Host Agent configuration file
agent.config file as follows:
the Navisphere Host Agent
configuration file agent.config file
as desired.
• Comment the
OptionsSupported
For a CX300, CX500, CX700, or
Autotrespass entry as follows: FC4700-Series storage system, go to
step 5. For an FC4500 storage system,
# OptionsSupported
go to 6.
Autotrespass
The above entry will set the
initiator type for the HBAs to no
auto trespass when they
register with the storage
system:
• Edit any other entries as
desired.
4
Server
Install admsnap
❑ If the server will be a SnapView
N/A
production or secondary host,
install the admsnap utility.
Go to step 7.
2-14
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
5
With Access Logix
CX400, CX600, or N/A
FC4700-Series
Storage-System
Without Access
Logix
Set
storage-system
type
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Perform this task either
Navisphere CLI
reference
• from an attached host or a host
networked to an attached host or
• from a laptop connected to the
storage system, as described in the
storage-system initialization or
setup guide.
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
command to set the system type
to no auto trespass:
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config a
where
hostname is the IP address or
network name of an SP in the
storage system.
Go to step 7.
6
FC4500
Storage-System
Without Access
Logix
Set
storage-system
type
N/A
Perform this task either
• from an attached host or a host
networked to an attached host, or
• from a laptop connected to a
storage-system serial port, as
described in the storage-system
setup guide.
Navisphere CLI
reference
From an attached or networked host
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
command to set the system type
to no auto trespass:
navicli -d device -h hostname
systemtype -config a
where
device is the storage system’s
name
hostname is the server’s name or
network address.
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and Existing Storage System
2-15
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
6
With Access Logix
FC4500
Storage-System
Without Access
Logix
Set
storage-system
type (cont.)
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
From a serially connected laptop
Navisphere CLI
reference
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
command to set the system type
to no auto trespass:
navicli -np -d device systemtype
-config a
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
7
8
Storage System
Update software
❑ If currently installed
Server
❑
Cable to switches
or storage system
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
storage-system software is not at
the required minimum revision
(see page 2-3), update it.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
Cable the HBA ports to the switch ❑
connected to the storage system
or to SP ports.
Cable the HBA ports to the switch Storage-system setup
connected to the storage system guide
or to SP ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
2-16
❑ If currently installed
storage-system software is not at
the required minimum revision
(see page 2-3), update it.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
the HBA connections to the switch
by checking the LED(s) for the
switch port connected to each
HBA port.
the storage-system connections
to the switch by checking the
LED(s) for the switch port
connected to each HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the switch
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the switch
port.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
8
9
With Access Logix
Server
Cable to switches
or storage system
(cont.)
Switches
Zone
Without Access Logix
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
For a SAN
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
path from each HBA port (host
initiator) to the appropriate SPs.
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide
Switch management
documentation
path from each HBA port (host
initiator) to the appropriate SPs.
❑ If SAN Copy, MirrorView, or
MirrorView/A is installed, create
any required zones.
❑
Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
For a CX400, CX600, or
FC4700-Series storage system, go to
step 11; for an FC4500 storage
system, go to step 13.
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and Existing Storage System
2-17
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
10 Storage System
Register HBAs
❑ Log in as root and restart the
❑ Log in as root and restart the
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
Navisphere Host Agent with the
following HP-UX commands:
Navisphere Host Agent with the
following HP-UX commands:
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Manager’s Connectivity Status
dialog box to verify that each HBA
is registered with the storage
system.
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
step 13.
11 CX300, CX400,
CX500, CX600,
CX700, or
FC4700-Series
Storage System
Set up security
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
12 CX300, CX400,
CX500, CX600,
CX700, or
FC4700-Series
Storage System
Set properties for
PowerPath
Perform this task either
• across the LAN connected to the
storage-system SPs or
• from an attached host or a host
networked to an attached host or
• from a laptop connected to the
storage system, as described in the
storage-system initialization or
setup guide.
define a global administrator and
domain (if not already defined)
and any additional users.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
define a global administrator (if
not already defined) and any
additional users.
CX400, CX600, or FC4700-Series
Perform this task either
• from an attached host or a host
networked to an attached host or
• from a laptop connected to the
storage system, as described in the
storage-system initialization or
setup guide.
From the LAN
❑ Use Navisphere Manager’s
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA ports
(initiators):
Failover mode to 1
Array commpath to Enabled
Go to step 14.
2-18
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help o
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
12 CX300, CX400,
From an attached or networked host or From an attached or networked host or Navisphere CLI
laptop
laptop
CX500, CX600,
reference
CX700, or
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI ❑ Use following Navisphere CLI
FC4700-Series
commands to set the following
commands to set the following
Storage System
storage-system properties for the
default storage-system properties:
Set properties for
server’s existing HBA existing
navicli -h hostname
PowerPath (cont.)
ports (initiators):
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
navicli -h hostname
storagegroup -sethost
arraycommpath 1
-host servername
-failovermode 1
where
hostname is the IP address or
navicli -h hostname
network
name of an SP in the
storagegroup -setpath
storage system.
-host servername
-arraycommpath 1
Go to step 14.
where
hostname is the IP address or
network name of an SP in the
storage system
servername is the server’s name
or network address
Go to step 14.
13 FC4500 Storage Perform this task either
System
• across the LAN connected to the
Set properties for
Navisphere portal for the storage
PowerPath
system, or
• from an attached host or a host
networked to an attached host, or
• from a laptop connected to a
storage-system serial port, as
described in the storage-system
setup guide.
Across LAN
❑ Use Navisphere Manager’s
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA ports
(initiators):
Perform this task either
• from an attached host or a host
networked to an attached host, or
• from a laptop connected to a
storage-system serial port, as
described in the storage-system
setup guide.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Failover mode to 1
Array commpath to Enabled
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and Existing Storage System
2-19
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
13 FC4500 Storage From an attached host or networked
Navisphere CLI
From an attached or networked host
host
System
reference
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
Set properties for ❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
PowerPath (cont.)
commands to set the following
default storage-system properties:
default storage-system properties
navicli -d device -h hostname
for the server’s existing HBA
failovermode 1
existing ports (initiators):
navicli -d device -h hostname
navicli -d device -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
storagegroup -sethost
-failovermode 1
where
device is the storage system’s
navicli -d device -h hostname
name
storagegroup -sethost
hostname
is the server’s name or
-arraycommpath 1
network address.
where
device is the storage system’s
name
hostname is the server’s name or
network address.
From a serially connected laptop
From a serially connected laptop
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI ❑
commands to set the following
default storage-system properties
for the server’s existing HBA
existing ports (initiators):
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername --arraycommpath 1
Storage-system setup
guide and Navisphere
Use the following Navisphere CLI
CLI reference
commands to set the following
default storage-system properties:
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
where
device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
servername is the name of the
server with the HBAs.
2-20
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
14 Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Make sure that each HBA sees
❑ Verify that each HBA sees only
HP-UX documentation
only the targets (SPs) to which it
is zoned with the following HP-UX
commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
❑ Verify that HP-UX sees device
entries for all LUNS with the
following HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
❑ Log in as root and restart the
the targets (SPs) to which it is
zoned with the HP-UX following
commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
❑ Verify that HP-UX sees device
entries for all LUNS with the
following HP-UX command:
❑ ioscan -fnC disk
❑ Log in as root and restart the
Navisphere Host Agent with the
following HP-UX commands:
Navisphere Host Agent with the
following HP-UX commands:
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
❑ Make sure again that each HBA
sees only the targets (SPs) to
which it is zoned with the following
HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
❑ Reverify that each HBA sees only HP-UX documentation
the targets (SPs) to which it is
zoned with the HP-UX following
commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
❑ Reverify that HP-UX sees device
❑ Reverify that HP-UX sees device
entries for all LUNS with the
following HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
entries for all LUNS with the
following HP-UX command:
❑ ioscan -fnC disk
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and Existing Storage System
2-21
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
15 Storage System
Configure
If the server will use an existing
Storage Group
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
connect the server to the Storage
Group.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that HP-UX
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that HP-UX
can recognize these LUNs with
the following HP-UX commands:
can recognize these LUNs with
the following HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
HP-UX documentation
If HP-UX does not recognize any
LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
If the server will use a new Storage
Group
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
create RAID Groups, bind LUNs,
create the Storage Group, and
assign LUNs to the Storage
Group.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
connect the server to the new
Storage Group.
2-22
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
16 Server
Make new LUNs
visible
❑ Log in as root and restart the
❑ Log in as root and restart the
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
Navisphere Host Agent with the
following HP-UX commands:
Navisphere Host Agent with the
following HP-UX commands:
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
Now the LUNs in the Storage
Group look like any other disks in
the server.
Now the LUNs look like any other
disks in the server.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that HP-UX
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that HP-UX
can recognize these LUNs with
the following HP-UX commands:
can recognize these LUNs with
the following HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
HP-UX documentation
If HP-UX does not recognize any
LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
❑ Verify that HP-UX sees device
entries for all LUNS with the
following HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
❑ Verify that HP-UX sees device
entries for all LUNS with the
following HP-UX command:
❑ ioscan -fnC disk
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs with the following
PowerPath command:
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs with the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection
to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are set as defined in
steps 5 and 12 or steps 6 and
13.
PowerPath product
guide
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are set as defined in
steps 5 and 12 or steps 6 and
13.
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and Existing Storage System
2-23
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
17 Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring
❑ Plan your monitoring
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
18 Server
Configure any
new PowerPath
devices
❑ Configure PowerPath with the
configuration.
configuration.
❑ Configure PowerPath with the
following command:
following command:
powermt config
powermt config
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
PowerPath product
guide
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs with the following
PowerPath command:
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs with the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
❑ If PowerPath can see all the path ❑ If PowerPath can see all the path
19 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
2-24
to the LUNs, save the PowerPath
configuration with the following
command:
to the LUNs, save the PowerPath
configuration with the following
command:
powermt save
powermt save
The PowerPath configuration is
saved in the following file:
The PowerPath configuration is
saved in the following file:
/etc/powermt.custom
/etc/powermt.custom
If you have a PowerPath license key
If you have a PowerPath license key
Note If your PowerPath license key is
not registered, the load balancing
policy is restricted to basic failover.
Note If your PowerPath license key is
not registered, the load balancing
policy is restricted to basic failover.
❑ Stop all applications accessing
❑ Stop all applications accessing
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
❑ View the LUNs available to the
❑ View the LUNs available to the
server using the following
PowerPath command:
server using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to
❑ Choose one available LUN to
receive I/O for the test.
receive I/O for the test.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
PowerPath product
guide
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
19 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key (cont.)
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN ❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN PowerPath product
using the following PowerPath
command:
using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a device that
represents the chosen LUN.
where x is a device that
represents the chosen LUN
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
Reference Document
guide
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
20 Server
Make LUNs
available to
HP-UX
Without Access Logix
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
powermt restore
powermt restore
❑ Prepare the LUNs to receive data ❑ Prepare the LUNs to receive data Host connectivity guide
using the Logical Volume
Manager (LVM).
using the Logical Volume
Manager (LVM).
and HP-UX
documentation
If HP-UX does not recognize any
LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist - New HP-UX Server and Existing Storage System
2-25
HP-UX Installation Checklist
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and New Storage
System
Complete the tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist before the
service provider arrives.
Task
1
2
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install additional
HBAs
If you need additional HBAs to provide more paths to the storage system,
install these HBAs.
Server
❑
Update Software
If the following software is currently installed and not at the required
minimum revision (page 2-3), update it:
Reference Document
HBA documentation
CAUTION Do not connect cables to the HBAs until you are told to do so
later in this procedure.
• HBA driver
• Navisphere Host Agent
HBA documentation
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
installation guide
• admsnap
3
Storage System
Update software
❑ If currently installed storage-system software is not at the required
minimum revision (see page 2-3), update it.
CAUTION During the software update, hosts connected to the storage
system will lose access to data if they do not have failover software or if all
paths to an SP are down.
4
5
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
❑ Make sure the HBA driver parameters are set to the values required for
Server
Set
storage-system
type
❑ Edit the Navisphere Host Agent configuration file agent.config to comment CX-Series Server
CLARiiON and PowerPath.
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior, such
as greatly increased I/O delays.
the OptionsSupported Autotrespass entry as follows:
# OptionsSupported Autotrespass
The above entry will set the initiator type for the HBAs to no auto trespass
when they register with the storage system.
❑ Log in as root and restart the Navisphere Host Agent with the following
HP-UX commands:
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
2-26
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Host
connectivity guide and
HBA documentation
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
6
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Insert the PowerPath installation CD and mount it.
❑ Install PowerPath.
❑ Register PowerPath.
Reference Document
PowerPath Release
Notes and PowerPath
for UNIX installation
and administrator’s
guide
❑ Install any PowerPath patches from the Software downloads page on the
EMC Powerlink website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
❑ Execute the following PowerPath command:
powermt config
PowerPath product
guide
❑ Checkpoint - Use the following PowerPath command to verify that
PowerPath sees the paths to the LUNs:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your PowerPath license key if you have one.
❑ If you did not follow the above steps exactly and caused any LUNs to
trespass, restore the LUNs to their original SP with the following PowerPath
command:
powermt restore
7
Storage System
Install
❑ Install the storage system in the cabinet, if not already installed.
Rails and cabinet
documentation
8
Storage System
Initialize and
install software
enablers
❑ Install the Navisphere Initialization Utility on a host on the same subnet as
Storage-system setup
guide
the storage-system management ports.
❑ Use the Navisphere Initialization Utility to initialize the storage system.
❑ If you have SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and/or MirrorView/A
software, install the enabler for them.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and New Storage System
2-27
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
9
With Access Logix
Storage System
❑
Cable to switch or
server and LAN
Connect the storage system to the switch or HBA ports.
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the storage-system connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each SP
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the SP is logged in
to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
❑ Cable each SP to the LAN connected to the hosts from which you will
manage the storage system.
10 Storage System
Set up security
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to define a global administrator and domain (if
❑
11 Storage System
Set properties for
PowerPath
not already defined) and any additional users.
From a laptop connected to the storage system, as described in the
storage-system initialization or setup guide, use the following Navisphere
CLI commands to set the default storage-system properties:
navicli -h hostname failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the storage
system.
2-28
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
Storage-system
initialization guide and
Navisphere CLI
reference
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
12 Server
❑
Cable additional
HBAs to switches
or storage system ❑
Cable any additional HBA ports to the switch connected to the storage
system or to SP ports.
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide
Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the HBA connections to the switch by
checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each additional HBA
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA port is
logged in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
13 Switches
Zone
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each additional HBA port (host
Switch management
documentation
initiator) to the SPs.
❑ If SAN Copy, MIrrorView, or MirrorView/A is installed, create any required
zones.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify the switch
connections to the storage system.
14 Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Make sure that each HBA sees only the targets (SPs) to which it is zoned
HP-UX documentation
with the following HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
❑ Verify that HP-UX sees device entries for all LUNS with the following
HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
❑ Log in as root and restart the Navisphere Host Agent with the following
HP-UX commands:
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
❑ Make sure again that each HBA sees only the targets (SPs) to which it is
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
HP-UX documentation
zoned with the following HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and New Storage System
2-29
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
14 Server
Make target SPs
available (cont.)
❑ Reverify that HP-UX sees device entries for all LUNS with the following
HP-UX documentation
15 Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group.
16 Server
Make LUNs
visible
❑ Log in as root and restart the Navisphere Host Agent with the following
HP-UX commands:
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that HP-UX can recognize these LUNs with the
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
HP-UX documentation
following HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
If HP-UX does not recognize any LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
❑ Verify that HP-UX sees device entries for all LUNS with the following
HP-UX documentation
HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
17 Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
2-30
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
❑
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
your monitoring configuration.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
18 Server
Configure
PowerPath
devices
❑ Use the following PowerPath command to configure PowerPath:
PowerPath product
guide
powermt config
❑ Checkpoint - Use the following PowerPath command to verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to the LUNs:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
If PowerPath cannot see all the paths, verify that
• you registered your PowerPath license key if you have one
• the OptionsSupported Autotrespass entry is defined as described in
step 5.
• the storage-system properties are set as defined in step 11.
❑ If PowerPath can see all the path to the LUNs, save the PowerPath
configuration with the following command:
powermt save
The PowerPath configuration is saved in the following file:
/etc/powermt.custom
19 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
If you have a PowerPath license key
Note If your PowerPath license key is not registered, the load balancing policy is
restricted to basic failover.
PowerPath product
guide
❑ View the LUNs available to the server using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a device that represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to LUN by viewing the output of the powermt
display dev=x every=2 command, and disconnect the cable to that HBA.
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and New Storage System
2-31
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
19 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key (cont.)
❑ View the output of the powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and
PowerPath product
guide
verify that
• The state of the uncabled path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining path(s) to the LUN, indicating that the
path failover was successful, and PowerPath is working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above steps exactly and caused any LUNs to
trespass, restore the LUNs to their original SP with the following PowerPath
command:
powermt restore
20 Server
Make LUNs
available to
HP-UX
❑ Prepare the LUNs to receive data using the Logical Volume Manager
(LVM).
If HP-UX does not recognize any LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
Host connectivity guide
and HP-UX
documentation
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
2-32
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and Existing Storage
System
Complete the tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist before the
service provider arrives.
The Without Access Logix column does not apply to CX300, CX500, and
CX700 storage systems because they ship from the factory with the Access
Logix enabler installed.
Task
1
2
3
Server
Unmount file
systems
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Unmount any file systems that
❑ Unmount any file systems that
HP-UX documentation
reside on the storage system.
reside on the storage system.
If you need additional HBAs to
❑
provide more paths to the storage
system, install these HBAs.
If you need additional HBAs to
HBA documentation
provide more paths to the storage
system, install these HBAs.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
Server
❑
Install additional
HBAs
Server
❑
Update Software
If the following software is
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision
(page 2-3), update it:
• HBA driver
• Navisphere Host Agent
❑ If the following software is
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision
(page 2-3), update it:
• HBA driver (Navisphere Host
Agent
• admsnap
4
Storage System ❑
Update software
If currently installed
storage-system software is not at
the required minimum revision
(see page 2-3), update it.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
❑ If currently installed
storage-system software is not at
the required minimum revision
(see page 2-3), update it.
HBA documentation
Navisphere Host Agent
and CLI for HP-UX
installation guide
SnapView installation
guide (revision A02 or
higher)
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and Existing Storage System
2-33
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
5
6
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
Server
Set
storage-system
type
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Make sure the HBA driver
❑ Make sure the HBA driver
HP-UX Host
connectivity guide and
HBS documentation
parameters are set to the values
required for CLARiiON and
PowerPath.
parameters are set to the values
required for CLARiiON and
PowerPath.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
❑ Edit the Navisphere Host Agent
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
configuration file agent.config to
comment the OptionsSupported
Autotrespass entry as follows:
# OptionsSupported
Autotrespass
The above entry will set the
initiator type for the HBAs to no
auto trespass when Host Agent is
restarted in the next step.
❑ Log in as root and restart the
❑ Log in as root and restart the
Navisphere Host Agent with the
following HP-UX commands:
Navisphere Host Agent with the
following HP-UX commands:
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
step 8.
❑ From the server, use the following Navisphere CLI
Navisphere CLI command to set
the system type to no auto
trespass:
For a CX400, CX600, or
FC4700-Series storage system
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config a
where hostname is the IP address
or network name of an SP in the
storage system.
2-34
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
reference
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
6
7
With Access Logix
Server
Set
storage-system
type (cont.)
CX300, CX400,
CX500, CX600,
CX700, or
FC4700-Series
Storage System
Set properties for
PowerPath
Without Access Logix
For a FC4500 storage system
navicli -d device systemtype
-config a
where
device is the storage system’s
name.
For an FC4500 storage system,
go to step 8.
For a server with registered HBAs
Reference Document
Navisphere CLI
reference
For a server with any HBAs
Perform this task either
Perform this task either
• across the LAN connected to the
• from an attached host or a host
storage-system SPs or
networked to an attached host or
• from an attached host or a host
• from a laptop connected to the
networked to an attached host or
storage system, as described in the
storage-system initialization or
• from a laptop connected to the
setup guide.
storage system, as described in the
storage-system initialization or
setup guide.
From the LAN
❑ Use Navisphere Manager’s
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA ports
(initiators):
Failover mode to 1
Array commpath to Enabled
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help o
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and Existing Storage System
2-35
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
7
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
CX300, CX400,
From an attached or networked host or From an attached or networked host or Navisphere CLI
laptop
laptop
CX500, CX600,
reference
CX700, or
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI ❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
FC4700-Series
commands to set the following
commands to set the following
Storage System
storage-system properties for the
storage-system properties:
Set properties for
server’s existing HBA existing
navicli -h hostname
PowerPath
ports (initiators):
failovermode 1
(cont.)
navicli -h hostname
navicli -h hostname
storagegroup -sethost
arraycommpath 1
-host servername
-failovermode 1
where
hostname is the IP address or
navicli -h hostname
network
name of an SP in the
storagegroup -setpath
storage system.
-host servername
-arraycommpath 1
Go to step 9.
where
hostname is the IP address or
network name of an SP in the
storage system
servername is the server’s name
or network address
For a server with unregistered HBAs
Perform this task either
• from an attached host or a host
networked to an attached host, or
• from a laptop connected to the
storage system, as described in the
storage-system initialization or
setup guide.
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system properties:
navicli -h hostname
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address
or network name of an SP in the
storage system.
Go step 9.
2-36
Reference Document
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
8
With Access Logix
FC4500 Storage For a server with registered HBAs
System
Perform this task either
Set properties for
• across the LAN connected to the
PowerPath
Navisphere portal for the storage
system, or
• from an attached host or a host
networked to an attached host, or
• from a laptop connected to a
storage-system serial port, as
described in the storage-system
setup guide.
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
For a server with any HBAs
Perform this task either
• from an attached host or a host
networked to an attached host, or
• from a laptop connected to a
storage-system serial port, as
described in the storage-system
setup guide.
Across LAN
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager’s
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA ports
(initiators):
Failover mode to 1
Array commpath to Enabled
From an attached host or networked
host
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA existing
ports (initiators):
navicli -d device -h hostname
storagegroup -sethost
-failovermode 1
navicli -d device -h hostname
storagegroup -sethost
-arraycommpath 1
where
device is the storage system’s
name
hostname is the server’s name or
network address.
From an attached or networked host
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
Navisphere CLI
reference
commands to set the following
default storage-system properties:
navicli -d device -h hostname
failovermode 1
navicli -d device -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
where
device is the storage system’s
name
hostname is the server’s name or
network address.
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and Existing Storage System
2-37
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
8
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
FC4500 Storage From a serially connected laptop
From a serially connected laptop
System
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI ❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
Set properties for
commands to set the following
commands to set the following
PowerPath
storage-system properties for the
default storage-system properties:
(cont.)
server’s existing HBA existing
navicli -np -d device
ports (initiators):
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
arraycommpath 1
servername -failovermode 1
where device is the name of the
navicli -np -d device
computer port connected to the
storagegroup -sethost -host
storage-system serial port (for
servername -arraycommpath 1
example, com1).
where
device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
servername is the name of the
server with the HBAs.
Reference Document
Storage-system
initialization guide and
Navisphere CLI
reference
For a server with unregistered HBAs
Perform this task either
• from an attached host or a host
networked to an attached host, or
• from at a laptop connected to a
storage-system serial port, as
described in the storage-system
setup guide.
From an attached or networked host
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system properties:
navicli -d device -h hostname
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname -d device
arraycommpath 1
where
device is the storage system’s
name
hostname is the host’s name or
network address.
2-38
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere CLI
reference
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
8
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
FC4500 Storage From a serially connected laptop
System
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
Set properties for
commands to set the following
PowerPath
default storage-system properties:
(cont.)
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide and Navisphere
CLI reference
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
9
Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Insert the PowerPath installation
CD and mount it.
❑ Insert the PowerPath installation
CD and mount it.
❑ Install PowerPath.
❑ Install PowerPath.
❑ Register PowerPath.
❑ Register PowerPath.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
http://powerlink.emc.com
❑ Execute the following PowerPath
❑ Execute the following PowerPath
command:
command:
powermt config
powermt config
PowerPath Release
Notes and PowerPath
for UNIX installation
and administrator’s
guide
PowerPath product
guide
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and Existing Storage System
2-39
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
9
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install PowerPath
(cont.)
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Checkpoint - Use the following
❑
PowerPath command to verify that
PowerPath sees the paths to the
LUNs:
Checkpoint - Use the following
PowerPath product
PowerPath command to verify that guide
PowerPath sees the paths to the
LUNs:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection
to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are set as defined in
step 7 or 8.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are set as defined in If you did not install any additional
step 7 or 8.
HBAs in the server, go to step 11.
If you did not install any additional
HBAs in the server, go to step 11.
❑ If PowerPath can see all the path ❑ If PowerPath can see all the path
10 Server
Cable additional
HBAs to
switches or
storage system
2-40
to the LUNs, save the PowerPath
configuration with the following
command:
to the LUNs, save the PowerPath
configuration with the following
command:
powermt save
powermt save
The PowerPath configuration is
saved in the following file:
The PowerPath configuration is
saved in the following file:
/etc/powermt.custom
/etc/powermt.custom
❑ Cable any additional HBA ports to ❑ Cable any additional HBA ports to Storage-system setup
the switch connected to the
storage system or to SP ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
the switch connected to the
storage system or to SP ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
the HBA connections to the switch
by checking the LED(s) for the
switch port connected to each
additional HBA port.
the HBA connections to the switch
by checking the LED(s) for the
switch port connected to each
additional HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the switch
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the switch
port.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
guide.
Switch documentation
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
10 Server
Cable additional
HBAs to
switches or
storage system
(cont.)
11 Switches
Zone
With Access Logix
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
For a SAN
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
path from each HBA port (host
initiator) to the appropriate SPs.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
12 Server
Make target SPs
available
Without Access Logix
❑ Make sure that each HBA sees
❑ Verify that each HBA sees only
entries for all LUNS with the
following HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
❑ Log in as root and restart the
Switch management
documentation
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
❑ Verify that HP-UX sees device
Switch documentation
path from each HBA port (host
initiator) to the appropriate SPs.
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
only the targets (SPs) to which it
is zoned with the following HP-UX
commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
Reference Document
HP-UX documentation
the targets (SPs) to which it is
zoned with the HP-UX following
commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
❑ Verify that HP-UX sees device
entries for all LUNS with the
following HP-UX command:
❑ ioscan -fnC disk
❑ Log in as root and restart the
Navisphere Host Agent with the
following HP-UX commands:
Navisphere Host Agent with the
following HP-UX commands:
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and Existing Storage System
2-41
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
12 Server
Make target SPs
available (cont.)
❑ Make sure again that each HBA
❑ Reverify that each HBA sees only HP-UX documentation
sees only the targets (SPs) to
which it is zoned with the following
HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
the targets (SPs) to which it is
zoned with the HP-UX following
commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
❑ Reverify that HP-UX sees device
❑ Reverify that HP-UX sees device
entries for all LUNS with the
following HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
entries for all LUNS with the
following HP-UX command:
❑ ioscan -fnC disk
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Manager’s Connectivity Status
dialog box to verify that each HBA
is registered with the storage
system.
13 Server
Configure
PowerPath
devices
❑ Use the following PowerPath
❑ Use the following PowerPath
command to configure
PowerPath:
command to configure
PowerPath:
powermt config
powermt config
❑ Checkpoint - Use the following
2-42
❑ Checkpoint - Use the following
PowerPath command to verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs:
PowerPath command to verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath cannot see all the
paths, verify that
If PowerPath cannot see all the
paths, verify that
• you registered your PowerPath
license key if you have one
• you registered your PowerPath
license key if you have one
• the OptionsSupported
Autotrespass entry is defined
as described in step 6
• the systemtype is defined as
described in step 6
• the storage-system properties
are set as defined in step 7 or 8
Reference Document
• the storage-system properties
are set as defined in step 7 or 8
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
PowerPath product
guide
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
13 Server
Configure
PowerPath
devices (cont.)
❑ If PowerPath can see all the path ❑ If PowerPath can see all the path PowerPath product
14 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
Without Access Logix
to the LUNs, save the PowerPath
configuration with the following
command:
to the LUNs, save the PowerPath
configuration with the following
command:
powermt save
powermt save
The PowerPath configuration is
saved in the following file:
The PowerPath configuration is
saved in the following file:
/etc/powermt.custom
/etc/powermt.custom
If you have a PowerPath license key
If you have a PowerPath license key
Note If your PowerPath license key is
not registered, the load balancing
policy is restricted to basic failover.
Note If your PowerPath license key is
not registered, the load balancing
policy is restricted to basic failover.
❑ Stop all applications accessing
❑ Stop all applications accessing
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
❑ View the LUNs available to the
❑ View the LUNs available to the
server using the following
PowerPath command:
server using the following
PowerPath command:
❑ powermt display dev=all
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to
❑ Choose one available LUN to
receive I/O for the test.
receive I/O for the test.
Reference Document
guide
PowerPath product
guide
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN ❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN
using the following PowerPath
command:
using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a device that
represents the chosen LUN.
where x is a device that
represents the chosen LUN
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
PowerPath Checklist - Existing HP-UX Server and Existing Storage System
2-43
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
14 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key (cont.)
❑ View the output of the powermt
❑ View the output of the powermt
PowerPath product
guide
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
15 Server
Mount file
systems
2-44
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
powermt restore
powermt restore
❑ Mount any file systems
❑ Mount any file systems
unmounted in step 1.
unmounted in step 1.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX documentation
HP-UX Installation Checklist
DMP Configurations for HP-UX
Read this section if you are installing an HP-UX VERITAS DMP
configuration with a new server and a new CX300, CX500, or CX700
storage system. A new server and storage system are defined as
follows:
New server - A server running HP-UX and not connected to any
storage system.
New storage system - A CX300, CX500, or CX700 storage system that
has the factory default settings and has never been connected to a
server.
Topics relating to the checklist for an HP-UX configuration with DMP
software are
◆
◆
◆
◆
Required Host Software Revisions................................................ 2-46
Prerequisites ..................................................................................... 2-46
Documentation................................................................................. 2-47
DMP Checklist - New HP-UX Server and New Storage
System ............................................................................................... 2-48
DMP Configurations for HP-UX
2-45
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Required Host
Software Revisions
◆
HP-UX operating system revision listed in the EMC Support
Matrix on the Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
HBA driver revision listed in the EMC Support Matrix on the
Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
VxVM 3.5 or higher
Refer to the EMC Support Matrix and the EMC PowerPath for UNIX Release
Notes on the Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com) for the
specific revision required for your HP-UX version.
Prerequisites
◆
All switches must be installed.
◆
Storage systems must be set up, initialized (if required), and
connected to switches, and any optional storage-system software
(Access Logix, SnapView, MirrorView, MirrorView/A, SAN
Copy) must be installed.
◆
Navisphere Manager must be installed.
◆
If any storage systems have SnapView, the admsnap utility must
be installed on the servers that will be the SnapView production
and secondary hosts.
◆
You must have a host that is
• Running an operating system that can support the Navisphere
Manager 6.X browser-based client. For an up-to-date list of
such operating systems, refer to the Navisphere Manager 6.X
release notes on http://powerlink.emc.com.
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system servers
and that will be connected to the SPs in the storage system.
2-46
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
◆
Documentation
You must have planned your LUNs and RAID Groups, and
Storage Groups if you have Access Logix. Be sure to consider
requirements for SnapView, SAN Copy, MirrorView, and
MirrorView/A if you have this software. The EMC CLARiiON
CX300, CX500, CX500i, and CX700 Storage Systems Configuration
Planning Guide (P/N 300-001-273) will help you with this
planning.
This checklist refers to some or all of the documents listed below. We
recommend that you load these documents on your service laptop
before starting the installation.
◆
Documentation that ships with
• HBA and HBA driver
• Switches
• HP-UX operating system
• VERITAS Volume Manager
◆
EMC Navisphere Host Agent and CLI for HP-UX Version 6.X
Installation Guide (P/N 069001146)
or
EMC CX-Series Server Software for HP-UX Installation Guide
(P/N 300-002-043)
◆
EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001125)
◆
EMC Navisphere Security Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001124)
◆
EMC Host Connectivity Guide for HP-UX (P/N 300-000-614)
DMP Configurations for HP-UX
2-47
HP-UX Installation Checklist
DMP Checklist - New HP-UX Server and New Storage System
Complete the tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist before the
service provider arrives.
Task
1
Server
Install HBAs,
drivers, cables
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install the HBAs.
HBA documentation
❑ Connect a cable from each host HBA port to a switch port or an SP port.
❑ Install the HBA driver.
2
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to the values required for CLARiiON.
Caution Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior, such
as greatly increased I/O delays.
Host connectivity guide
and HBA
documentation
❑ Reboot the server to complete the installation of the drivers.
❑ Checkpoint — For a SAN, verify the server connections to the switch by
checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• Only the left LED is green, which indicates that a 1-Gbit HBA port is
logged in to the switch port.
• Both LEDs are green, which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in
to the switch port.
3
Switches
❑ Verify that the servers and SPs are connected to the switch.
Connect servers
and SPs
Documentation that
ships with the switches
4
Switches
Zone
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each host initiator to an SP.
Switch documentation
5
Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Make sure each HBA sees only the targets (SPs) to which it is zoned with
HP-UX documentation
the following HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
❑ Checkpoint - Reverify that HP-UX sees device entries for all LUNS with
the following HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
2-48
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
6
Server
Install Host
Agent
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent.
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
❑ Modify user login scripts.
❑ Edit the Navisphere Host Agent configuration file (agent.config) as follows:
• Add the following entry if it does not already exist:
device auto auto
• Add at least one privileged user.
❑ Verify that the Navisphere Host Agent configuration file (agent.config) has
the following entry commented out:
# Options Supported Autotrespass
(leading # is present)
The above entry will set the initiator type for the HBAs to auto trespass
when Host Agent is restarted later in this procedure.
❑ Continue to edit other entries in the Navisphere Host Agent configuration
file (agent.config) as desired.
❑ Restart the Host Agent to register the HBAs with the storage system.
7
8
Storage System
Set up security
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to define a global administrator and domain (if
Storage System
Set properties
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the default failover
not already defined) and any additional users.
mode and array commpath properties with the following commands:
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
Navisphere CLI
reference
navicli -h hostname failovermode 2
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the storage
system.
9
Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the host initiators to Storage Groups.
DMP Checklist - New HP-UX Server and New Storage System
2-49
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
10 Server
Make LUNs
visible
❑ Log in as root and restart the Navisphere Host Agent with the following
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
HP-UX commands:
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that HP-UX can recognize these LUNs with the
HP-UX documentation
following HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
If HP-UX does not recognize any LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
❑ Checkpoint - Reverify that HP-UX sees device entries for all LUNS with
the following HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
11 Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
12 Server
Install the
CLARiiON DMP
driver
❑ Download the CLARiiON DMP driver to the server from Services on the
❑
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
your monitoring configuration.
VERITAS website.
❑ Use the swinstall command to install the CLARiiON DMP driver on the
server.
Note Until rootdg is created (part of vxinstall command) on at least one
disk, DMP displays an error message looking for the config daemon.
13 Server
Reboot
❑ Reboot the server using the reboot command
• to make LUNs available to the OS
• to make LUNs accessible via both SPs
VERITAS Volume
Navisphere Manager
documentation
VERITAS Volume
Navisphere Manager
documentation
Important If you do not set the failover mode to 2, you will see only half of the
expected paths to the SPs.
❑
14 Server
Configure
Volume Manager
2-50
Run vxinstall to configure Volume Manager and place at least one LUN
under VxVM control.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
VERITAS Volume
Navisphere Manager
documentation
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
15 Server
Verify DMP
installation
❑ Log into Volume Manager Storage Administrator (VMSA)
VERITAS Volume
Navisphere Manager
documentation
❑ Double-click a disk icon.
❑ In the list of disks, double-click a disk you know belongs to the CLARiiON
storage system.
❑ Click the disks tab to verify there are the expected number of Primary and
Secondary paths.
❑ Verify that it displays the correct number of paths with
vxdisk list device
where device is the name of the disk you selected.
16 Server
Verify DMP
Operation
❑ Start I/O to the VERITAS Volume.
❑ Identify the CLARiiON devices under the Volume with
VERITAS Volume
Manager
documentation
vxprint -v
❑ Choose one of the CLARiiON devices and determine all its paths with
vxdisk list device
or
vxdmpadm getsubpaths
dmpnodename=device
where device is the name of the CLARiiON device
❑ Determine the control through which I/O is going with
HP-UX documentation
iostat -xn
❑ Determine the controller through which I/O is going with
iostat -xn
❑ Determine the HBA and SP to which that controller corresponds.
❑ Disconnect the path to that SP.
❑ Verify that the path to the chosen CLARiiON device is disabled with
vxdisk list device
or
vxdmpadm getsubpaths
dmpnodename=device
where device is the name of the CLARiiON device
DMP Checklist - New HP-UX Server and New Storage System
2-51
HP-UX Installation Checklist
2-52
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
16 Server
Verify DMP
Operation
(cont.)
❑ Verify that I/0 is still running with
HP-UX documentation
iostat -xn
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Configurations for HP-UX Without EMC Failover Software
Read this section if you are installing an HP-UX configuration with a
new server that will not run EMC failover and a new storage system.
A new server and storage system are defined as follows:
New server - A server running HP-UX and not connected to any
storage system.
New storage system - A CX300, CX500, or CX700 storage system that
has the factory default settings and has never been connected to a
server.
Topics relating to the checklist for an HP-UX configuration without
EMC failover software are
◆
◆
◆
Prerequisites
Prerequisites ..................................................................................... 2-53
Documentation................................................................................. 2-54
Without EMC Failover Software Checklist - New HP-UX Server
and New Storage System................................................................ 2-55
◆
All switches must be installed.
◆
Storage systems must be set up, initialized (if required), and
connected to switches, and any optional storage-system software
(Access Logix, SnapView, MirrorView, MirrorView/A) you have
must be installed.
◆
If any storage systems have SnapView, the admsnap utility must
be installed on the servers that will be the SnapView production
and secondary hosts.
◆
If you will use Navisphere Manager 6.X, you must have a host
that is
• Running an operating system that can support the Navisphere
Manager 6.X browser-based client. For an up-to-date list of
such operating systems, refer to the Navisphere Manager 6.X
release notes on http://powerlink.emc.com.
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system servers
and that will be connected to the SPs the storage system.
Configurations for HP-UX Without EMC Failover Software
2-53
HP-UX Installation Checklist
◆
Documentation
2-54
You must have planned your LUNs and RAID Groups, and
Storage Groups if you have Access Logix. Be sure to consider
requirements for SnapView, MirrorView, and MirrorView/A if
you have this software. The EMC CLARiiON CX300, CX500,
CX500i, and CX700 Storage Systems Configuration Planning Guide
(P/N 300-001-273) will help you with this planning.
This checklist refers to some or all of the documents listed below. We
recommend that you load these documents on your service laptop
before starting the installation.
◆
Documentation that ships with
• HBA and HBA driver
• Switches and switch management software
• HP-UX operating system
◆
EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001125)
(P/N 069001143)
◆
EMC Navisphere Security Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001124)
◆
EMC Host Connectivity Guide for HP-UX (P/N 300-000-614)
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Without EMC Failover Software Checklist - New HP-UX Server and
New Storage System
Complete the tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist before the
service provider arrives.
Task
1
Server
Install HBAs,
drivers, cables
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install the HBAs.
HBA documentation
❑ Connect a cable from each host HBA port to a switch port or an SP port.
❑ Install the HBA driver.
2
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to the values required for CLARiiON.
Host connectivity guide
and HBA
documentation
❑ Reboot the server to complete the installation of the drivers.
❑ Checkpoint — For a SAN, verify the server connections to the switch by
Switch documentation
checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
3
Switches
Zone
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each host initiator to an SP.
4
Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Make sure each HBA sees only the targets (SPs) to which it is zoned with HP-UX documentation
Switch management
documentation
the following HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
❑ Checkpoint - Reverify that HP-UX sees device entries for all LUNS with
the following HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
Without EMC Failover Software Checklist - New HP-UX Server and New Storage System
2-55
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
5
Server
Install Host
Agent
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent.
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
❑ Modify user login scripts.
❑ Edit the Navisphere Host Agent configuration file agent.config file as
follows:
• Add the following entry if it does not already exist:
device auto auto
• Add at least one privileged user.
• For FC4500 storage systems, if you know the IP addresses of the portal
storage-system SPs, add an entry with the following format for each SP
to the agent.config file:
system@SP_ip_address
where SP_ip_address is the address of the SP.
❑ Continue to edit the Navisphere Host Agent configuration file agent.config
file as follows:
• Comment out or comment the OptionsSupported Autotrespass entry
as follows:
No auto trespass
(for HP-UX without PV Links)
# OptionsSupported Autotrespass
The above entry will set the initiator type for the HBAs to no auto
trespass when Host Agent is restarted later in this procedure.
Auto trespass
(for HP-UX with PVLinks)
OptionsSupported Autotrespass
The above entry will set the initiator type for the HBAs to auto trespass
when Host Agent is restarted later in this procedure.
• Edit any other entries as desired.
6
2-56
Storage System
Set up security
❑ For Navisphere 6.X, use Navisphere Manager to define a global
Navisphere security
administrator and domain (if not already defined) and any additional users. administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
7
Storage System
Set properties
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the default failover
Navisphere CLI
reference
mode and array commpath properties with the following commands:
navicli -h hostname failovermode 0
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the storage
system.
8
Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group.
9
❑ Log in as root and restart the Navisphere Host Agent with the following
Server
Make LUNs
visible
HP-UX commands:
/sbin/init.d/agent stop
/sbin/init.d/agent start
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that HP-UX can recognize these LUNs with the
CX-Series Server
Software for HP-UX
Installation Guide
HP-UX documentation
following HP-UX commands:
ioscan -fnC disk
insf -e
If HP-UX does not recognize any LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
❑ Verify that HP-UX sees device entries for all LUNS with the following
HP-UX command:
ioscan -fnC disk
If you do not see two paths to each LUN, verify that the
OptionsSupported Autotrespass entry in the Host Agent configuration
file is uncommented or commented as described in step 5.
10 Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
❑
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
your monitoring configuration.
Without EMC Failover Software Checklist - New HP-UX Server and New Storage System
2-57
HP-UX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
11 Server
Make LUNs
available to
HP-UX
❑ Prepare the LUNs to receive data using the Logical Volume Manager
Host connectivity guide
and HP-UX
documentation
(LVM).
If HP-UX does not recognize any LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
2-58
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
3
Invisible Body Tag
Linux Installation
Checklist
This chapter contains checklists of the tasks required to install a
CLARiiON storage system in a configuration with a Linux® server
and PowerPath, VERITAS DMP, or with no EMC failover software.
Topics are
◆
◆
◆
PowerPath Configurations for Linux..............................................3-2
DMP Configurations for Linux ......................................................3-39
Configurations for Linux Without EMC Failover Software.......3-47
Linux Installation Checklist
3-1
Linux Installation Checklist
PowerPath Configurations for Linux
Read this section if you are installing a Linux PowerPath
configuration with a new or existing server and a new or existing,
storage system. A new and existing server and a new and existing
storage system are defined as follows:
new server - A server running Linux that is not connected to any
storage system.
existing server - A server running Linux that is already connected to
one or more storage systems.
new storage system - A CX300, CCX500, or CX700 storage system
that has the factory default settings and has never been connected to a
server.
existing storage system - A CX200, CX300, CX400, CX500, CX600,
CX700, FC4500, or FC4700-Series storage system that is already
connected to one or more servers and is in a Navisphere domain.
All CLARiiON storage systems connected to the server must be CX200,
CX300, CX400, CX500, CX600, CX700, FC4500, or FC4700-Series storage
systems. If any other type of CLARiiON storage system is connected to the
server, the server cannot run PowerPath.
Topics relating to the checklists for Linux PowerPath configurations
are
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
3-2
Required Host Software Revisions.................................................. 3-3
Prerequisites ....................................................................................... 3-3
Documentation................................................................................... 3-4
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and New Storage
System.................................................................................................. 3-7
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and Existing Storage
System................................................................................................ 3-13
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and New Storage
System................................................................................................ 3-23
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and Existing
Storage System ................................................................................. 3-29
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Linux Installation Checklist
Required Host
Software Revisions
◆
Linux operating system revision and errata listed in the EMC
Support Matrix on the Powerlink website
(http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
HBA driver revision listed in the EMC Support Matrix on the
Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
Linux PowerPath
• For CX200, CX400, CX600, and FC4700-Series storage systems
Version 3.0.2 or higher
• For CX300, CX500, and CX700, and storage systems
Version 3.0.3 or higher
Refer to the EMC Support Matrix and the EMC PowerPath for Linux on the
Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com) for the specific revision
required for your Linux version.
Prerequisites
◆
You must have a host that is
• Running an operating system that can support the Navisphere
Manager 6.X browser-based client. For an up-to-date list of
such operating systems, refer to the Navisphere Manager 6.X
release notes on http://powerlink.emc.com).
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system servers
and that will be connected to the SPs in CX200, CX300, CX400,
CX500, CX600, CX700 or FC4700-Series storage systems.
◆
For most configurations, you must also have a host that is
• Running Navisphere 6.X CLI.
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system server
and that you will connect to SPs in CX200, CX300, CX400,
CX500, CX600, CX700 or FC4700-Series storage systems.
◆
For an FC4500 storage system connected to a server on which you
will install PowerPath, you must have a computer that you can
connect to the storage system. This computer must run
• RedHat 2.1 Advance Server e.9 or higher kernel and
• Navisphere Host Agent and CLI version 6.4 or higher
PowerPath Configurations for Linux
3-3
Linux Installation Checklist
◆
You must have planned your LUNs and RAID Groups, and
Storage Groups if you have Access Logix. Be sure to consider
requirements for SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and
MirrorView/A if you have this software. The following
documents will help you with this planning:
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System CX200-Series Configuration
Planning Guide (P/N 014003115)
• EMC CLARiiON CX300, CX500, CX500i, and CX700 Storage
Systems Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 300-001-273)
• EMC CX400-Series and CX600-Series Storage Systems
Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003113)
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System Model FC4700-2
Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003087)
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System Model FC4700 Configuration
Planning Guide (P/N 014003016)
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System Model FC4500, FC5300, and
FC5700 Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003039)
Documentation
Each checklist refers to some or all of the documents listed below. We
recommend that you load these documents on your service laptop or,
for an FC4500 or FC4700, on the computer you will connect to the
storage system, before starting the installation.
◆
Documentation that ships with
• HBA and HBA driver
This documentation is also available from the following website:
For Qlogic HBAs and drivers:
http://www.qlogic.com/support/drivers_software.asp
and select EMC in the OEM-approved Drivers/Firmware list at the
bottom of the page.
• Switches and switch management software
• Red Hat Linux operating system
◆
PowerPath Version 4.3 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-673)
or
PowerPath Version 3.0 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-047)
3-4
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Linux Installation Checklist
◆
PowerPath for Linux Version 4.3.1 Installation Guide
(P/N 300-002-247)
or
PowerPath for Linux Version 4.3 Installation Guide
(P/N 300-001-687)
or
PowerPath Version 3.0 Installation and Administration Guide for
Linux (P/N 300-000-514)
◆
EMC Navisphere Host Agent and CLI for Linux Version 6.X
Installation Guide (P/N 069001148)
or
EMC CX-Series Server Software for Windows Installation Guide
(P/N300-002-038)
◆
EMC Navisphere Command Line Interface (CLI) Reference
(P/N 069001038)
◆
EMC SnapView Installation Guide (P/N 069001193, revision A02 or
higher)
◆
EMC SAN Copy Installation Guide (P/N 069001187)
◆
EMC Rails and Enclosures Field Installation Guide
(P/N 300-001-799)
◆
EMC Rails and Enclosures Installation Guide for 19-Inch NEMA
Cabinets (P/N 014003082) - for SPS installation only
◆
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2) CX200-Series Setup
and Cabling Guide (P/N 014003116)
◆
EMC CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE) Setup Guide
(P/N 300-001-276, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-276, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2) CX400-Series Setup
and Cabling Guide (P/N 014003105)
PowerPath Configurations for Linux
3-5
Linux Installation Checklist
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) CX600-Series Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 014003078)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup
Guide (P/N 300-001-274, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-274), rev A01) and EMC CLARiiON
CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization Guide
(P/N 300-001-272)
3-6
◆
EMC Storage Systems CX200-Series Initialization Guide
(P/N 014003117)
◆
EMC Storage Systems CX400-Series and CX600-Series Initialization
Guide (P/N 014003112)
◆
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk-Array Enclosure (DAE2) Setup and Cabling
Guide (P/N 014003104)
◆
FC4500 Setup Guide (P/N 014003102, revision A03 or higher)
◆
FC4700-2 Setup Guide (P/N 0140373)
◆
EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001125)
◆
EMC Navisphere Security Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001124)
◆
EMC Host Connectivity Guide for Linux (P/N 300-000-604)
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Linux Installation Checklist
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and New Storage
System
Complete the tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist before the
service provider arrives.
Task
1
Server
Install HBAs and
driver
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install HBAs.
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 3-4)
❑ Boot host.
❑ Install the appropriate version of the HBA driver.
2
Server
Set HBA driver
properties
Make sure the QLogic HBA driver is always loaded after the internal SCSI
adapter driver as specified by the /etc/modules.conf file.
PowerPath for Linux
installation guide
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters, except for the persistent bindings, to the
Linux host connectivity
guide and HBA
documentation (see
URL on page 3-4)
values required for CLARiiON and PowerPath.
❑ You will set the persistent bindings after the storage system is installed
and the switches are zoned.
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O delays.
❑ Reboot host.
3
4
Server
Install Host
Agent or Server
Utility
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent or Navisphere Server Utility and the
Server
Install admsnap
❑ If the server will be a SnapView production or secondary host, install the
Navisphere CLI.
CX-Series Server
Software for Linux
Installation Guide
admsnap utility.
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and New Storage System
3-7
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
5
Switches
Install
With Access Logix
Reference Document
For a SAN
Rails, cabinet, and
switch documentation
❑ Install switches, if not already installed.
❑ Connect a cable from each host HBA port to a switch port.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify the HBA connection to the switch by checking the
LED(s) for the switch port connected to the HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA is
logged in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
6
Storage System
Install
❑ Install the storage system in the cabinet, if not already installed.
7
Storage System
Initialize and
install software
enablers
❑ Install the Navisphere Initialization Utility on a host on the same subnet as Storage-system setup
the storage-system management ports.
guide
❑ Use the Navisphere Initialization Utility to initialize the storage system.
❑ If you have SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and/or MirrorView/A
software, install their enablers.
3-8
Rails and cabinet
documentation
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
8
Storage System
Cable to switch
or server and
LAN
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Connect the storage system to the switch or HBA ports.
Storage-system setup
guide.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the storage-system connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each SP
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the SP is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
❑ Cable each SP to the LAN connected to the hosts from which you will
manage the storage system.
9
Storage System
Set up security
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to define a global administrator and domain (if
not already defined) and any additional users.
10 Storage System ❑
Set Properties for
PowerPath
Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the following default
storage-system properties:
Storage-system setup
guide.
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
Navisphere CLI
reference
navicli -h hostname systemtype -config 3
navicli -h hostname failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the
storage system.
11 Switches
Zone
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each HBA port (host initiator) to
Switch management
documentation
the appropriate SPs.
❑ If SAN Copy, MirrorView, and/or MirrorView/A is installed, create any
required zones.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify the switch
connections to the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and New Storage System
3-9
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
12 Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Add persistent bindings to the HBA driver configuration file.
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 3-4)
Note: You need the WWPN of each SP port for the bindings.
❑ Reboot the server.
Linux documentation
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere Manager’s Connectivity Status dialog box
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
to verify that each HBA is registered with the storage system.
❑ Checkpoint - Make sure the /proc/scsi/scsi directory has entries for
Linux documentation
LUNZs.
Note: LUNZs are required to register the server HBAs with the storage
system because LUNs have not be configured yet.
❑ Checkpoint - Make sure the file /proc/scsi file in the directory for HBAs,
has entries for the expected targets (HBAs).
13 Server
Prepare Server
for PowerPath
❑ Make sure you have 128 sd and sg devices in the /dev directory.
PowerPath for Linux
installation guide
❑ Ensure that the PowerPath driver’s major numbers (232-239) are not
already in use.
14 Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group.
❑ Reload the driver (if the driver is loaded as a module) or reboot the server HBA documentation
(if the driver is static to the kernel) so that Linux recognizes the LUNs.
Now the LUNs in the Storage Group look like any other disks in the server.
❑ Checkpoint - Make sure all LUNs have entries in the /proc/scsi/scsi file Linux documentation
and in the directory for the HBAs in the /proc/scsi directory.
If all LUN entries are missing from the file, verify the zoning. If only some
LUNs are missing, use Navisphere Manager to check that the LUNs are
assigned to the server’s Storage Group.
3-10
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere Manager
online help
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
15 Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Mount the CD-ROM.
❑ Install PowerPath.
Reference Document
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath for
Linux installation guide
❑ Unmount the CD-ROM and remove it from the drive.
❑ If you have a PowerPath license key, register it.
❑ Reboot the server to complete the installation of PowerPath.
❑ If you loaded the HBA driver as a module, verify that all extensions are
loaded.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches from the Software downloads page on the
EMC Powerlink website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that PowerPath sees all the paths to the LUNs using PowerPath product
the following PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
guide
If PowerPath does not see the LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection to the Storage Group.
• Make sure that you registered your PowerPath license key if you have
one.
• Verify that the storage-system properties are as defined in step 10.
• Verify that you have the appropriate revision of the HBA driver loaded.
16 Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
❑
17 Server
❑
Make LUNs
available to Linux
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
your monitoring configuration.
Create partitions or the pertinent database file systems on the LUNs.
Host connectivity guide
and Linux
documentation
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and New Storage System
3-11
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
18 Server
If you have a PowerPath license key
Test PowerPath Note If your PowerPath license key is not registered, the load balancing policy
with a license key is restricted to basic failover.
Reference Document
PowerPath product
guide
❑ View the LUNs available to the server using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to the LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and disconnect the cable to
that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and
verify that
• The state of the uncabled paths becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining path(s) to the LUN, indicating that the
failover path was successful, and PowerPath is working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you caused any LUNs to trespass, restore the LUNs to their original SP
with the following PowerPath command:
powermt restore
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
3-12
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Linux Installation Checklist
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and Existing Storage
System
Complete the tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist before the
service provider arrives.
The Without Access Logix column does not apply to CX300, CX500, and
CX700 storage systems because they ship from the factory with the Access
Logix enabler installed.
Task
1
Server
Install HBAs and
driver
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install HBAs.
❑ Install HBAs.
❑ Reboot host.
❑ Reboot host.
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 3-4)
❑ Install the appropriate version of
❑ Install the appropriate version of
the HBA driver.
2
Server
Set HBA driver
properties
Make sure the QLogic HBA driver is
always loaded after the internal SCSI
adapter driver as specified by the
/etc/modules.conf file.
Make sure the QLogic HBA driver is
always loaded after the internal SCSI
adapter driver as specified by the
/etc/modules.conf file.
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters,
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters,
4
❑ You will set the persistent
bindings after the storage system
is installed and the switches are
zoned.
bindings after the storage system
is installed and the switches are
zoned.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
❑ Reboot host.
PowerPath for Linux
installation guide
Linux host connectivity
except for the persistent bindings, guide and HBA
to the values required for
documentation (see
CLARiiON and PowerPath.
URL on page 3-4)
except for the persistent bindings,
to the values required for
CLARiiON and PowerPath.
❑ You will set the persistent
3
the HBA driver.
❑ Reboot host.
Server
Install Host
Agent or Server
Utility
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent ❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent CX-Series Server
Server
Install admsnap
❑ If the server will be a SnapView
or Navisphere Server Utility and
the Navisphere CLI.
or Navisphere Server Utility and
the Navisphere CLI.
Software for Linux
Installation Guide
N/A
production or secondary host,
install the admsnap utility.
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and Existing Storage System
3-13
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
5
6
3-14
Storage System
Update software
Server
Cable HBAs to
switches or
storage system
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
❑ If currently installed
❑ If currently installed
Reference Document
storage-system software is not at
the required minimum revision,
update it.
Navisphere Manager
storage-system software is not at administrator’s guide
the required minimum revision,
and online help
update it.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
❑ Cable the HBA ports to the switch ❑ Cable the HBA ports to the switch Storage-system setup
connected to the storage system
or to SP ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
connected to the storage system
or to SP ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
guide.
Switch documentation
the HBA connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for
the switch port connected to each
additional HBA port.
the HBA connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for
the switch port connected to each
additional HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the Switch documentation
following:
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
7
Switches
Zone
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
For a SAN
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
Switch management
documentation
path from each additional HBA
port (host initiator) to the SPs.
path from each additional HBA
port (host initiator) to the SPs.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
8
Server
Register HBAs
❑ Restart the Navisphere Host
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
N/A
CX-Series Server
Software for Linux
Installation Guide.
Agent or run the Navisphere
Server Utility.
❑ To make LUNZs visible to the
❑ To make LUNZs visible to the
HBAs, either reload the HBA
driver or reboot the server.
HBAs, either reload the HBA
driver or reboot the server.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
Manager’s Connectivity Status
step 10.
dialog box to verify that each HBA
is registered with the storage
system.
Linux documentation
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
step 10.
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and Existing Storage System
3-15
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
9
With Access Logix
CX200, CX300,
❑
CX400, CX500,
CX600, CX700,
or FC4700-Series
Storage System
Set properties for
PowerPath
Without Access Logix
Use Navisphere Manager’s
❑
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA ports
(initiators):
Initiator Type to CLARiiON Open
Failover mode to 1
Array commpath to Enabled
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
step 11.
Reference Document
Use the following Navisphere CLI Navisphere Manager
command to determine the
administrator’s guide
default storage-system type:
and online help and
Navisphere CLI
navicli -h hostname systemtype
reference
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set it
to 3:
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same time.
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
navicli -h hostname
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
step 11.
3-16
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
reference
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
10 FC4500 Storage ❑
System
Set properties for
❑
PowerPath
Connect a computer to the serial
port on the storage system.
Without Access Logix
❑ Connect a computer to the serial Storage-system setup
port on the storage system.
From the computer connected to ❑
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA existing
ports (initiators):
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -type 3
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -arraycommpath 1
where
device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
servername is the name of the
server with the HBAs.
Reference Document
guide
From the computer connected to Navisphere CLI
the storage system’s serial port, reference
use the following Navisphere CLI
command to determine the
default storage-system type:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set it
to 3:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype -config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
❑ From the computer connected to Navisphere CLI
the storage system’s serial port, reference
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and Existing Storage System
3-17
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
11 Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Add persistent bindings to the
❑ Add persistent bindings to the
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 3-4)
HBA driver configuration file.
HBA driver configuration file.
Note: You need the WWPN of
each SP port for the bindings.
Note: You need the WWPN of
each SP port for the bindings.
❑ Reboot the server.
❑ Reboot the server.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Manager’s Connectivity Status
dialog box to verify that each HBA
is registered with the storage
system.
❑ Checkpoint - Make sure the
3-18
Linux documentation
❑ Checkpoint - Make sure the
/proc/scsi/scsi file has entries
for LUNZs.
/proc/scsi/scsi file has entries
for LUNZs.
Note: LUNZs are required to
register the server HBAs with the
storage system because LUNs
have not be configured yet.
Note: LUNZs are required to
register the server HBAs with the
storage system because LUNs
have not be configured yet.
❑ Checkpoint - Make sure the file
❑ Checkpoint - Make sure the file
for the HBA directory in the
/proc/scsi directory has entries
for the expected targets (HBAs).
for the HBA directory in the
/proc/scsi directory has entries
for the expected targets (HBAs).
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Linux documentation
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
12 Storage System
Configure
❑ If the server will use an existing
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage Group, use Navisphere
Manager to connect the server to
the Storage Group.
❑ If the server will use a new
Storage Group, use Navisphere
Manager to create RAID Groups,
bind LUNs, create the Storage
Group, and assign LUNs to the
Storage Group.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
connect the server to a Storage
Group.
❑ Reload the driver (if the driver is
❑ Reload the driver (if the driver is
loaded as a module) or reboot the
server (if the driver is static to the
kernel) so that Linux recognizes
the LUNs.
loaded as a module) or reboot the
server (if the driver is static to the
kernel) so that Linux recognizes
the LUNs.
Now the LUNs in the Storage
Group look like any other disks in
the server.
Now the LUNs look like any other
disks in the server.
HBA documentation
❑ Checkpoint - Make sure all LUNs ❑ Checkpoint - Make sure all LUNs Linux documentation
have entries in the
/proc/scsi/scsi file and in the
directory for the HBAs in the
/proc/scsi directory.
have entries in the
/proc/scsi/scsi file and in the
directory for the HBAs in the
/proc/scsi directory.
If all LUN entries are missing from
the file, verify the zoning. If only
some LUNs are missing, use
Navisphere Manager to check
that the LUNs are assigned to the
server’s Storage Group.
If all LUN entries are missing from
the file, verify the zoning. If only
some LUNs are missing, use
Navisphere Manager to check
that the LUNs are assigned to the
server’s Storage Group.
For an FC4500 storage system
For an FC4500 storage system
❑ Disconnect the computer from the ❑ Disconnect the computer from the
serial port on the storage system.
13 Server
Prepare Server
for PowerPath
serial port on the storage system.
❑ Make sure you have 128 sd and
❑ Make sure you have 128 sd and
sg devices in the /dev directory.
sg devices in the /dev directory.
❑ Ensure that the PowerPath
driver’s major numbers (232-239)
are not already in use.
Storage-system setup
guide
PowerPath for Linux
installation guide
❑ Ensure that the PowerPath
driver’s major numbers (232-239)
are not already in use.
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and Existing Storage System
3-19
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
14 Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Mount the CD-ROM.
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Mount the CD-ROM.
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath for
Linux installation guide
❑ Install PowerPath.
❑ Install PowerPath.
❑ Unmount the CD-ROM and
❑ Unmount the CD-ROM and
remove it from the drive.
❑ If you have a PowerPath license
key, register it.
❑ Reboot the server to complete
the installation of PowerPath.
remove it from the drive.
❑ If you have a PowerPath license
key, register it.
❑ Reboot the server to complete
the installation of PowerPath.
❑ If you loaded the HBA driver as a ❑ If you loaded the HBA driver as a
module, verify that all extensions
are loaded.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
http://powerlink.emc.com
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection
to the Storage Group.
• Make sure that you registered
your PowerPath license key if
you have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 10.
• Verify that you have the
appropriate revision of the
HBA driver loaded.
15 Server
❑
Make LUNs
available to Linux
3-20
module, verify that all extensions
are loaded.
Create partitions or the pertinent
database file systems on the
LUNs.
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Make sure that you registered
your PowerPath license key if
you have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 10.
• Verify that you have the
appropriate revision of the
HBA driver loaded.
PowerPath product
guide
❑ Create partitions or the pertinent Host connectivity guide
database file systems on the
LUNs.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
and Linux
documentation
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
16 Server
If you have a PowerPath license key
Test PowerPath Note If your PowerPath license key is
with a license key not registered, the load balancing
policy is restricted to basic failover.
Without Access Logix
If you have a PowerPath license key PowerPath product
guide
Note If your PowerPath license key is
not registered, the load balancing
policy is restricted to basic failover.
❑ View the LUNs available to the
❑ View the LUNs available to the
server using the following
PowerPath command:
server using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to
❑ Choose one available LUN to
receive I/O for the test.
receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen
❑ View the paths to the chosen
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
the LUN by viewing the output of
the powermt display dev=x
every=2 command, and
disconnect the cable to that HBA.
the LUN by viewing the output of
the powermt display dev=x
every=2 command, and
disconnect the cable to that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt
❑ View the output of the powermt
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the failover path was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the failover path was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
Reference Document
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
PowerPath Checklist — New Linux Server and Existing Storage System
3-21
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
16 Server
❑
Test PowerPath
with a license key
(cont.)
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
If you caused any LUNs to
❑
trespass, restore the LUNs to
their original SP with the following
PowerPath command:
If you caused any LUNs to
PowerPath product
trespass, restore the LUNs to
guide
their original SP with the following
PowerPath command:
powermt restore
powermt restore
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
3-22
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Linux Installation Checklist
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and New Storage
System
Complete the tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist before the
service provider arrives.
Task
1
2
3
With Access Logix
Reference Document
Server
Install additional
HBAs
❑ If you need additional HBAs to provide more paths to the storage system, HBA documentation
Server
Update Software
❑ If the following software is currently installed and not at the required
Server
Set HBA driver
properties
install these HBAs.
(see URL on page 3-4)
CAUTION Do not connect cables to the HBAs until you are told to do so
later in this procedure.
minimum revision (page 3-3), update it:
• HBA driver (save the persistent bindings as you will need to add them
to the new driver)
• admsnap
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 3-4)
SnapView installation
guide (revision A02 or
higher)
❑ Make sure the HBA driver parameters, except for the persistent bindings, Linux host connectivity
are set to the values required for CLARiiON and PowerPath.
You will set the persistent bindings after the storage system is installed
and the switches are zoned.
guide and HBA
documentation (see
URL on page 3-4)
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O delays.
❑ If you added additional HBAs or drivers, reboot the host.
4
Storage System
Install
❑ Install the storage system in the cabinet, if not already installed.
5
Storage System
Initialize and
install software
enablers
❑ Install the Navisphere Initialization Utility on a host on the same subnet as Storage-system setup
the storage-system management ports.
Rails and cabinet
documentation
guide
❑ Use the Navisphere Initialization Utility to initialize the storage system.
❑ If you have SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and/or MirrorView/A
software, install their enablers.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and New Storage System
3-23
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
6
Storage System
Cable to switch
or server and
LAN
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Connect the storage system to the switch or HBA ports.
Storage-system setup
guide
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the storage-system connections to the
Switch documentation
switch by checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each SP
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the SP is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
❑ Cable each SP to the LAN connected to the hosts from which you will
manage the storage system.
7
8
Storage System
Set up security
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to define a global administrator and domain (if
Storage System ❑
Set Properties for
PowerPath
not already defined) and any additional users.
Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the following default
storage-system properties:
navicli -h hostname systemtype -config 3
navicli -h hostname failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the
storage system.
3-24
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Storage-system setup
guide
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
Navisphere CLI
reference
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
9
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Cable additional
HBAs to switches
❑
or storage
system
Cable any additional HBA ports to the switch connected to the storage
system or to SP ports.
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide.
Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the HBA connections to the switch by
checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each additional HBA
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA port is
logged in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
10 Switches
Zone
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each additional HBA port (host
Switch management
documentation
initiator) to the SPs.
❑ If SAN Copy, MirrorView, and/or MirrorView/A is installed, create any
required zones.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify the switch
connections to the storage system.
11 Server
Add Persistent
Bindings
❑ Add persistent bindings to the HBA driver configuration file.
12 Server
Register
additional HBAs
with storage
system
❑ To make LUNZs visible to the HBAs, either reload the HBA driver or reboot Linux documentation
Note: You need the WWPN of each SP port for the bindings.
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 3-4)
the server.
Note: LUNZs are required to register the server HBAs with the storage
system because LUNs have not be configured yet.
❑ If you reloaded the HBA driver, restart the Navisphere Host Agent or run
the Navisphere Server Utility.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere Manager’s Connectivity Status dialog box
to verify that each HBA is registered with the storage system.
CX-Series Server
Software for Linux
Installation Guide
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and New Storage System
3-25
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
13 Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ If you did not reboot the server in step 12, reboot the server now.
Linux documentation
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere Manager’s Connectivity Status dialog box
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
to verify that each HBA is registered with the storage system.
❑ Checkpoint - Make sure the /proc/scsi/scsi directory has entries for
Linux documentation
LUNZs.
Note: LUNZs are required to register the server HBAs with the storage
system because LUNs have not be configured yet.
❑ Checkpoint - Make sure the file for the HBAs, in the /proc/scsi directory,
has entries for the expected targets (HBAs).
14 Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group
❑ Reload the driver (if the driver is loaded as a module) or reboot the server HBA documentation
(if the driver is static to the kernel) so that Linux recognizes the LUNs.
(see URL on page 3-4)
Now the LUNs in the Storage Group look like any other disks in the server.
❑ Checkpoint - Make sure all LUNs have entries in the /proc/scsi/scsi
Linux documentation
directory and in the file for the HBAs in the /proc/scsi directory.
If any LUN entries are missing from the file, verify the zoning.
15 Server
Prepare Server
for PowerPath
❑ Make sure you have 128 sd and sg devices in the /dev directory.
❑ Ensure that the PowerPath driver’s major numbers (232-239) are not
already in use.
3-26
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
PowerPath for Linux
installation guide
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
16 Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Mount the CD-ROM.
❑ Install PowerPath.
Reference Document
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath for
Linux installation guide
❑ Unmount the CD-ROM and remove it from the drive.
❑ If you have a PowerPath license key, register it.
❑ Reboot the server to complete the installation of PowerPath.
❑ If you loaded the HBA driver as a module, verify that all extensions are
loaded.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches from the Software downloads page on the
EMC Powerlink website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
17 Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
18 Server
Make LUNs
available to
additional HBAs
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to disconnect and then reconnect the server
❑
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
your monitoring configuration.
and its Storage Group.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Reboot the server to scan for new LUNs.
❑ Checkpoint - Make sure all LUNs have entries in the /proc/scsi/scsi
Linux documentation
directory and in the file for the HBAs in the /proc/scsi directory.
If any LUN entries are missing from the file, verify the zoning.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that PowerPath sees all the paths to the LUNs using PowerPath product
the following PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
guide
If PowerPath does not see the LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection to the Storage Group.
• Make sure that you registered your PowerPath license key if you have
one.
• Verify that the storage-system properties are as defined in step 10.
• Verify that you have the appropriate revision of the HBA driver loaded.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and New Storage System
3-27
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
19 Server
If you have a PowerPath license key
Test PowerPath Note If your PowerPath license key is not registered, the load balancing policy
with a license key is restricted to basic failover.
Reference Document
PowerPath product
guide
❑ View the LUNs available to the server using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to the LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and disconnect the cable to
that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and
verify that
• The state of the uncabled path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining path(s) to the LUN, indicating that the
failover path was successful, and PowerPath is working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you caused any LUNs to trespass, restore the LUNs to their original SP
with the following PowerPath command:
powermt restore
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
3-28
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Linux Installation Checklist
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and Existing Storage
System
This checklist assumes that the existing Linux server and existing
storage system are already connected in a SAN or direct attach
configuration. Complete the tasks highlighted with grey in the
checklist before the service provider arrives.
The Without Access Logix column does not apply to CX300, CX500, and
CX700 storage systems because they ship from the factory with the Access
Logix enabler installed.
Task
1
2
3
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install additional
HBAs
Server
❑
Update Software
Server
Set HBA driver
properties
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
If you need additional HBAs to
❑
provide more paths to the storage
system, install these HBAs.
If you need additional HBAs to
HBA documentation
provide more paths to the storage (see URL on page 3-4)
system, install these HBAs.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
If the following software is
❑
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision
(page 3-3), update it:
• HBA driver (save the persistent
bindings as you will need to
add them to the new driver)
• admsnap
If the HBA driver software is
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision
(page 3-3), update it: (save the
persistent bindings as you will
need to add them to the new
driver).
❑ Make sure the HBA driver
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 3-4)
SnapView installation
guide (revision A02 or
higher)
❑ Make sure the HBA driver
parameters, except for the
persistent bindings, are set to the
values required for CLARiiON
and PowerPath.
Linux host connectivity
parameters, except for the
guide and HBA
persistent bindings, are set to the documentation (see
values required for CLARiiON
URL on page 3-4)
and PowerPath.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
❑ If you added additional HBAs or
drivers, reboot the host.
❑ If you added additional HBAs or
drivers, reboot the host.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and Existing Storage System
3-29
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
4
Storage System
Update software
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
❑ If currently installed
❑ If currently installed
storage-system software is not at
the required minimum revision,
update it.
Navisphere Manager
storage-system software is not at administrator’s guide
the required minimum revision,
and online help
update it.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access
to data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access
to data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
step 6.
5
3-30
Reference Document
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
step 6.
CX200, CX300, For new or replacement HBAs
For any HBAs
Navisphere CLI
CX400, CX500,
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI ❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI reference
CX600, CX700,
command to determine the
command to determine the
or FC4700-Series
default storage-system type:
default storage-system type:
Storage System
navicli -h hostname systemtype
navicli -h hostname systemtype
Set properties for
PowerPath
where hostname is the IP
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
SP in the storage system.
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
5
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
CX200, CX300, For new or replacement HBAs
For any HBAs (cont.)
Navisphere CLI
CX400, CX500, (cont.)
reference
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
CX600, CX700,
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
or FC4700-Series
commands to set the following
default storage-system
Storage System
default storage-system
properties:
Set properties for
properties:
navicli -h hostname
PowerPath
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
(cont.)
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
SP in the storage system.
For existing HBAs
An existing HBA is one that is
registered with the storage system.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager’s
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA ports
(initiators):
Initiator Type to CLARiiON Open
Failover mode to 1
Array commpath to Enabled
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and Existing Storage System
3-31
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
6
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
FC4500 Storage ❑ Connect a computer to the serial ❑ Connect a computer to the serial
System
port on the storage system.
port on the storage system.
Set properties for
For new HBAs
For any HBAs
PowerPath
❑ From the computer connected to ❑ From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
use the following Navisphere CLI
command to determine the
command to determine the
default storage-system type:
default storage-system type:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype
navicli -np -d device
systemtype
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype -config 3
navicli -np -d device
systemtype -config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
❑ From the computer connected to ❑ From the computer connected to
3-32
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide
Navisphere CLI
reference
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
6
With Access Logix
FC4500 Storage
System
Set properties for
PowerPath
(cont.)
Without Access Logix
For existing HBAs
Reference Document
Navisphere CLI
reference
An existing HBA is one that is
registered with the storage system.
❑ From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA existing
ports (initiators):
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -type 3
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -arraycommpath 1
where
device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
servername is the name of the
server with the HBAs
7
Server
Re-install Host
Agent or Server
Utility
❑ Reinstall (reload) the Navisphere ❑ Reinstall (reload) the Navisphere CX-Series Server
Host Agent or Navisphere Server
Utility.
❑ Start Navisphere Host Agent or
run the Navisphere Server Utility.
Host Agent or Navisphere Server Software for Linux
Utility.
Installation Guide
❑ Start Navisphere Host Agent or
Navisphere Server Utility.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and Existing Storage System
3-33
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
8
9
With Access Logix
Server
Cable additional
HBAs to
switches or
storage system
Switches
Zone for
additional HBAs
the switch connected to the
storage system or to SP ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
the switch connected to the
storage system or to SP ports.
the HBA connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for
the switch port connected to each
additional HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which
indicates that a 1-Gbit SP port
is logged in to the switch port.
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which
indicates that a 1-Gbit SP port
is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
For a SAN
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
path from each additional HBA
port (host initiator) to the SPs.
path from each additional HBA
port (host initiator) to the SPs.
❑ Add persistent bindings to the
guide.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
the HBA connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for
the switch port connected to each
additional HBA port.
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
3-34
Reference Document
❑ Cable any additional HBA ports to ❑ Cable any additional HBA ports to Storage-system setup
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
10 Server
Add Persistent
Bindings
Without Access Logix
Switch management
documentation
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
❑ Add persistent bindings to the
HBA driver configuration file.
HBA driver configuration file.
Note: You need the WWPN of
each SP port for the bindings.
Note: You need the WWPN of
each SP port for the bindings.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 3-4)
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
11 Server
Register
additional HBAs
with storage
system
❑ To make LUNZs visible to the
❑ To make LUNZs visible to the
Linux documentation
HBAs, either reload the HBA
driver or reboot the server.
HBAs, either reload the HBA
driver or reboot the server.
❑ If you reloaded the HBA driver,
N/A
CX-Series Server
Software for Linux
Installation Guide
restart the Navisphere Host
Agent or run Navisphere Server
Utility.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Manager’s Connectivity Status
dialog box to verify that each HBA
is registered with the storage
system.
12 Server
Make LUNs
available to
additional HBAs
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
N/A
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
disconnect and then reconnect
the server and its Storage Group.
❑ Reboot the server to scan for new ❑ Reboot the server to scan for new
LUNs.
LUNs.
❑ Checkpoint - Make sure all LUNs ❑ Checkpoint - Make sure all LUNs Linux documentation
have entries in the
/proc/scsi/scsi directory and in
the file for the HBAs in the
/proc/scsi directory.
have entries in the
/proc/scsi/scsi directory and in
the file for the HBAs in the
/proc/scsi directory.
If any LUN entries are missing
from the file, verify the zoning.
If any LUN entries are missing
from the file, verify the zoning.
For an FC4500 storage system
For an FC4500 storage system
❑ Disconnect the computer from
❑ Disconnect the computer from
the serial port on the storage
system.
13 Server
Prepare Server
for PowerPath
the serial port on the storage
system.
❑ Make sure you have 128 sd and
❑ Make sure you have 128 sd and
sg devices in the /dev directory.
sg devices in the /dev directory.
❑ Ensure that the PowerPath
driver’s major numbers (232-239)
are not already in use.
❑ Manually unload the Navisphere
Host Agent or Navisphere Server
Utility.
❑ Install any required Red Hat
patches.
Storage-system setup
guide
PowerPath for Linux
installation
❑ Ensure that the PowerPath
driver’s major numbers (232-239)
are not already in use.
❑ Manually unload the Navisphere
CX-Series Server
Host Agent or Navisphere Server Software for Linux
Utility.
Installation Guide
❑ Install any required Red Hat
patches.
PowerPath for Linux
installation
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and Existing Storage System
3-35
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
14 Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Mount the CD-ROM.
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Mount the CD-ROM.
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath for
Linux installation and
administrator’s guide
❑ Install PowerPath.
❑ Install PowerPath.
❑ Unmount the CD-ROM and
❑ Unmount the CD-ROM and
remove it from the drive.
❑ If you have a PowerPath license
key, register it.
❑ Reboot the server to complete
the installation of PowerPath.
remove it from the drive.
❑ If you have a PowerPath license
key, register it.
❑ Reboot the server to complete
the installation of PowerPath.
❑ If you loaded the HBA driver as a ❑ If you loaded the HBA driver as a
module, verify that all extensions
are loaded.
3-36
module, verify that all extensions
are loaded.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
http://powerlink.emc.com
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
PowerPath sees the paths to the
LUNs using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
PowerPath sees the paths to the
LUNs using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection
to the Storage Group.
• Make sure that you registered
your PowerPath license key if
you have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 5.
• Verify that you have the
appropriate revision of the
HBA driver loaded.
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Make sure that you registered
your PowerPath license key if
you have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 5.
• Verify that you have the
appropriate revision of the
HBA driver loaded.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
PowerPath product
guide
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
15 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
If you have a PowerPath license key If you have a PowerPath license key PowerPath product
guide
If your PowerPath license key is not
If your PowerPath license key is not
registered, the load balancing policy is registered, the load balancing policy is
restricted to basic failover.
restricted to basic failover.
❑ View the LUNs available to the
❑ View the LUNs available to the
server using the following
PowerPath command:
server using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to
❑ Choose one available LUN to
receive I/O for the test.
receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen
❑ View the paths to the chosen
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt
❑ View the output of the powermt
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the failover path was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the failover path was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
Reference Document
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Linux Server and Existing Storage System
3-37
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
15 Server
❑ If you caused any LUNs to
❑ If you caused any LUNs to
Test PowerPath
with a license
key (cont.)
3-38
Reference Document
trespass, restore the LUNs to
their original SP with the following
PowerPath command:
PowerPath product
trespass, restore the LUNs to
guide
their original SP with the following
PowerPath command:
powermt restore
powermt restore
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Linux Installation Checklist
DMP Configurations for Linux
Read this section if you are installing a Linux VERITAS DMP
configuration with a new server and a new storage system. A new
server and a new storage system are defined as follows:
new server - A server running Linux and not connected to any
storage system.
new storage system - A CX300, CX500, or CX700 storage system that
has factory default settings and has never been connected to a server.
Topics relating to the checklist for Linux DMP configurations are
◆
◆
◆
◆
Required Host
Software Revisions
Prerequisites
Required Host Software Revisions................................................ 3-39
Prerequisites ..................................................................................... 3-39
Documentation................................................................................. 3-40
DMP Checklist - New Linux Server and New Storage System 3-42
◆
RedHat Linux operating system revision and patches listed in the
EMC Support Matrix on the Powerlink website
(http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
HBA driver revision listed in the EMC Support Matrix on the
Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
VxVM 3.2 update 2 or higher
◆
You have set up storage-system security (see Security
administrator’s guide and Navisphere Manager online help).
◆
You have installed any switches and connected the server HBAs
and storage-system SPs to switch ports (see switch
documentation).
◆
You have installed Navisphere Manager.
DMP Configurations for Linux
3-39
Linux Installation Checklist
◆
You have a host that is
• Running an operating system that can support the Navisphere
Manager 6.X browser-based client. For an up-to-date list of
such operating systems, refer to the Navisphere Manager 6.X
release notes on http://powerlink.emc.com.
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system server
that you will connect to the SPs in the storage system.
◆
You must have planned your LUNs and RAID Groups, and
Storage Groups if you have Access Logix. Be sure to consider
requirements for SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and
MirrorView/A if you have this software. The EMC CLARiiON
CX300, CX500, CX500i, and CX700 Storage Systems Configuration
Planning Guide (P/N 300-001-273) will help you with this
planning.
Documentation
This checklist refers to some or all of the documents listed below. We
recommend that you load these documents on your service laptop
before starting the installation.
◆
Documentation that ships with the HBA and HBA driver.
This documentation is also available from the following website
For QLogic HBAs and drivers:
http://www.qlogic.com/support/drivers_software.asp
and select EMC in the OEM-approved Drivers/Firmware list at the
bottom of the page.
◆
Documentation that ships with
• Switches and switch management software
• RedHat Linux operating system
• VERITAS Volume Manager
◆
EMC Navisphere Host Agent and CLI for Linux Version 6.X
Installation Guide (P/N 069001148)
or
EMC CX-Series Server Software for Windows Installation Guide
(P/N 300-002-038)
◆
3-40
EMC Rails and Enclosures Installation Guide for 19-Inch NEMA
Cabinets (P/N 014003082)
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Linux Installation Checklist
◆
EMC CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE) Setup Guide
(P/N 300-001-276, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-276, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup
Guide (P/N 300-001-274, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-274), rev A01) and EMC CLARiiON
CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization Guide
(P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC CLARiiON 2-Gigabit Disk-Array Enclosure (DAE2) Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 014003104)
◆
EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001125)
◆
EMC Navisphere Security Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001124)
◆
EMC Host Connectivity Guide for Linux (P/N 300-000-604)
DMP Configurations for Linux
3-41
Linux Installation Checklist
DMP Checklist - New Linux Server and New Storage System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be completed
before the service provider arrives.
Task
1
Server
Install HBAs,
drivers, cables
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install the Fibre Channel HBAs, and, if needed, install the optical GBIC
HBA documentation (see
URL on Page 3-40)
connector on the 1-Gbit PCI HBA.
❑ Install the HBA driver.
❑ Connect cables from the host HBA port to a switch port.
2
Server
Edit the HBA
driver file
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to the settings required for CLARiiON,
HBA documentation (see
except for the persistent bindings, which you will set after you have zoned URL on Page 3-40)
the switches.
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O delays
3
Server
Install the Host
Agent or Server
Utility
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent or Navisphere Server Utility and CLI.
CX-Series Server
Software for Linux
Installation Guide
❑ If not already done, connect the LAN to the server and perform any
needed LAN configuration.
4
Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide and
online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide and
online help.
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
5
6
3-42
Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
Storage System
Set the
arraycommpath
mode
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI command to set the default
❑ Set user options, create templates, and set up your monitoring
configuration.
storage-system arraycommpath property with the following command:
navicli -h sp arraycommpath 1
where sp is the IP address or network name of the SP in the storage
system.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Event Monitor
administrator’s guide and
online help.
Navisphere CLI reference
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
7
Switch
❑
Connect servers
and SPs
8
Switch
Zone switches
Reference Document
Verify that the servers and SPs are connected to the switch.
For a SAN
Documentation that ships
with the switches
Documentation that ships
with the switches
❑ Zone switches.
This provides a path from the host initiator to the SP.
You will need to know the WWPN of the host initiators - available in the
switch’s name server table.
❑ Reboot the server using the reboot command to load the drivers and
perform a login of the host initiators and SPs to the fabric ports on the
switch.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify that the HBAs
and storage systems are logged in to the switch as fabric ports, and to
verify that each HBA sees only the targets (SPs) to which it is zoned.
❑ Add persistent bindings to the HBA driver configuration file.
9
Server
Add persistent
bindings
10
Storage System ❑ Before you connect the server to a storage group, use the Connectivity
Status dialog in Navisphere Manager to verify that the host initiators are
Verify host
registered.
initiators are
registered
11
Storage System
Connect host
initiators to
Storage Groups
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect servers to Storage Groups
HBA documentation (see
URL on Page 3-40)
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide and
online help
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide and
online help
❑ Reboot the server using the reboot command so that Linux recognizes
the LUNs.
Now the LUNs in the Storage Group look like any other disks in the
server.
❑ Checkpoint - Use the fdisk -l command to verify that the operating
system sees all the LUNs and label any new LUNs.
12
Server
Install Volume
Manager and
DMP
❑ Use the rpm command to add Volume Manager and DMP to the server.
❑ Install any recommended VERITAS updates.
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
Important To install the CLARiiON DMP driver, you must install VERITAS 3.2
update 2.
Be sure to label all LUNs in order to make them visible to VERITAS DMP.
DMP Checklist - New Linux Server and New Storage System
3-43
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
13
Server
Install the
CLARiiON DMP
driver
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Download the CLARiiON DMP driver to the server from Services on the
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
VERITAS website.
❑ Use the rpm command to install the CLARiiON DMP driver on the server.
Note Until rootdg is created (part of vxinstall command) on at least one
disk, DMP displays an error message looking for the config daemon.
14
Storage System ❑
Set the system
type and failover
mode
Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the default
storage-system type and failover mode properties:
navicli man page or
Navisphere CLI reference
navicli -h sp systemtype -config 3
navicli -h sp storagegroup -sethost -host linux_host -failovermode 2
where
sp is the IP address or network name of the SP in the storage system.
linux_host is the name of the Linux server
15
❑ Use the fdisk command to create at least one DOS partition for Volume
Server
Manager.
Create DOS
partition for
Volume Manager
16
Server
Reboot
❑ Reboot the server using the reboot command
Linux documentation
Linux documentation
•to make LUNs available to Linux
•to make LUNs accessible via both SPs
Important If you do not set the failover mode to 2, you will see only half of the
expected paths to the SPs.
17
Server
❑
Configure
Volume Manager
18
Server
Verify DMP
installation
Run vxinstall to configure Volume Manager and place at least one LUN
under VxVM control.
For VXVM 3.5 or higher
❑ Log into VERITAS Enterprise Administrator (VEA).
❑ Click the host name for the server.
❑ Click disks.
❑ Click a device that you know belongs to the CLARiiON storage system.
❑ Click the paths tab for that device.
❑ Verify that the device has primary and secondary paths to it.
❑ Verify the state of the device (enabled or disabled).
3-44
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
18
Server
Verify DMP
installation
(cont.)
With Access Logix
Reference Document
For a VxVM version less than 3.5
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
❑ Log into Volume Manager Storage Administrator (VMSA)
❑ Double-click a disk icon.
❑ In the list of disks, double-click a disk you know belongs to the CLARiiON
storage system.
❑ Click the disks tab to verify there are the expected number of Primary
and Secondary paths.
❑ Verify that it displays the correct number of paths with
vxdisk list device
where device is the name of the disk you selected.
19
Server
Verify DMP
Operation
❑ Start I/O to the VERITAS Volume.
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
❑ Identify the CLARiiON devices under the Volume with
vxprint -v
❑ Choose one of the CLARiiON devices and determine all its paths with
vxdisk list device
or
vxdmpadm getsubpaths
dmpnodename=device
where device is the name of the CLARiiON device
❑ Determine the control through which I/O is going with
iostat -xn
❑ Determine the controller through which I/O is going with
iostat -xn
❑ Determine the HBA and SP to which that controller corresponds.
❑ Disconnect the path to that SP.
DMP Checklist - New Linux Server and New Storage System
3-45
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
19
Server
Verify DMP
Operation
(cont.)
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Verify that the path to the chosen CLARiiON device is disabled with
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
vxdisk list device
or
vxdmpadm getsubpaths
dmpnodename=device
where device is the name of the CLARiiON device
❑ Verify that I/0 is still running with
iostat -xn
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
!
CAUTION
If you want to install any new software or upgrade any existing
software on a storage system after DMP is installed and running,
you should use the Navisphere Manager Software Installation
Wizard. If this wizard is not supported for your storage system, be
sure to refer to the "Special NDU Procedure" in the EMC Linux
Utility Kit Release Notes, which are available on the EMC
Powerlink website.
3-46
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Linux Installation Checklist
Configurations for Linux Without EMC Failover Software
Read this section if you are installing a Linux configuration with a
new server that will not run EMC failover software and a new storage
system. A new server and storage system are defined as follows:
New server - A server running Linux with no EMC failover software
and not connected to any storage system.
New storage system - A CX300, CX500, or CX700 storage system that
has the factory default settings and has never been connected to a
server.
Topics relating to the checklist for a Linux configuration without
EMC failover software are
◆
◆
◆
Prerequisites
Prerequisites ..................................................................................... 3-47
Documentation................................................................................. 3-48
Without EMC Failover Software Checklist — New Linux Server
and New Storage System................................................................ 3-49
◆
All switches must be installed.
◆
Storage systems must be set up, initialized (if required), and
connected to switches, and any optional storage-system software
(Access Logix, SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView,
MirrorView/A) you have must be installed.
◆
If any storage systems have SnapView, the admsnap utility must
be installed on the servers that will be the SnapView production
systems.
◆
If you will use Navisphere Manager 6.X, you must have a host
that is
• Running an operating system that can support the Navisphere
Manager 6.X browser-based client. For an up-to-date list of
such operating systems, refer to the Navisphere Manager 6.X
release notes on http://powerlink.emc.com.).
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system servers
and that will be connected to the SPs in the storage system.
Configurations for Linux Without EMC Failover Software
3-47
Linux Installation Checklist
◆
Documentation
You must have planned your LUNs and RAID Groups, and
Storage Groups if you have Access Logix. Be sure to consider
requirements for SAN Copy, SnapView, and MirrorView if you
have this software. The EMC CLARiiON CX300, CX500, CX500i,
and CX700 Storage Systems Configuration Planning Guide (P/N
300-001-273) will help you with this planning.
This checklist refers to some or all of the documents listed below. We
recommend that you load these documents on your service laptop
before starting the installation.
◆
Documentation that ships with
• HBA and HBA driver
This documentation is also available from the following websites:
For Emulex HBAs and drivers:
http://www.emulex.com/ts/docoem/framemc.htm
For Qlogic HBAs and drivers:
http://www.qlogic.com/support/home_support.asp
and select EMC in the OEM selection box at the bottom of the page.
• Switches and switch management software
• Red Hat Linux operating system
3-48
◆
EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001125)
◆
EMC Navisphere Security Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001124)
◆
EMC Host Connectivity Guide for Linux (P/N 300-000-604)
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Linux Installation Checklist
Without EMC Failover Software Checklist — New Linux Server and
New Storage System
Complete the tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist before the
service provider arrives.
Task
1
Server
Install HBAs,
drivers, cables
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install the HBAs.
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 3-48)
❑ Connect a cable from each host HBA port to a switch port or an SP port.
❑ Boot host.
❑ Install the HBA driver.
2
❑ For a Qlogic HBA, set the SAN Topology value in the HBA BIOS.
Server
Set the HBA
driver
parameters
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the server connections to the switch by
Host connectivity guide
and HBA documentation
(see URL on page 3-48)
checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each HBA.
For 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
Host connectivity guide
and HBA documentation
(see URL on page 3-48)
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
3
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each host initiator to an SP.
Switches
Zone
❑ Reboot the server.
Switch management
documentation
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that each HBA sees only the targets (SPs) to which it
is zoned.
4
Server
Install Host
Agent or Server
Utility
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent or Navisphere Server Utility and the
Navisphere CLI.
CX-Series Server
Software for Linux
Installation Guide
❑ If you installed the Host Agent, edit the agent.config file to add the
following entry if it does not already exist:
device auto auto
Without EMC Failover Software Checklist — New Linux Server and New Storage System
3-49
Linux Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
5
Storage System
Set up security
❑ For Navisphere 6.X, use Navisphere Manager to define a global
6
Storage System
Set properties
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the default failover
Reference Document
Navisphere security
administrator and domain (if not already defined) and any additional users. administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
mode and array commpath properties:
Navisphere CLI
reference
navicli -h hostname failovermode 0
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 0
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the
storage system.
7
Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group.
❑ Reload the driver (if the driver is loaded as a module) or reboot the server HBA documentation
(if the driver is static to the kernel) so that Linux recognizes the LUNs.
Now the LUNs in the Storage Group look like any other disks in the server.
If Linux does not recognize any LUNs, verify the connection to the Storage
Group.
8
9
Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
❑
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
your monitoring configuration.
Server
❑ Create partitions or the pertinent database file systems on the LUNs.
Make LUNs
If Linux does not recognize any LUNs, verify the connection to the
available to Linux
Storage Group.
Host connectivity guide
and Linux
documentation
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
3-50
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
4
Invisible Body Tag
NetWare Installation
Checklists
This chapter contains checklists of the tasks required to install a
CLARiiON storage system in a configuration with a Novell®
NetWare® server and PowerPath failover software.
NetWare Installation Checklists
4-1
NetWare Installation Checklists
PowerPath Configurations for NetWare
Read this section if you are installing a NetWare PowerPath
configuration with a new or existing server and a new or existing
storage system. A new and existing server and a new and existing
storage system are defined as follows:
new server - A server running NetWare and not connected to any
storage system.
existing server - A server running NetWare and that is already
connected to one or more storage systems.
new storage system - A CX300, CX500, or CX700 storage system that
has the factory default settings and has never been connected to a
server.
existing storage system - A CX200, CX300, CX400, CX500, CX600,
CX700, FC4500, or FC4700-Series storage system that is already
connected to one or more servers and is in a Navisphere domain.
All CLARiiON storage systems connected to the server must be CX200,
CX300, CX400, CX500, CX600, CX700, FC4500, FC4700-Series, or
FC5300 storage systems. If any other type of CLARiiON storage system is
connected to the server, the server cannot run PowerPath.
Topics relating to the checklists for NetWare PowerPath
configurations are
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
4-2
Required Host Software Revisions.................................................. 4-3
Prerequisites ....................................................................................... 4-3
PowerPath Checklist — New NetWare Server and New Storage
System.................................................................................................. 4-7
PowerPath Checklist — New NetWare Server and Existing
Storage System ................................................................................. 4-12
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and New
Storage System ................................................................................. 4-21
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and Existing
Storage System ................................................................................. 4-28
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
NetWare Installation Checklists
Required Host
Software Revisions
◆
NetWare operating system revision and kernel listed in the EMC
Support Matrix on the Powerlink website
(http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
HBA driver revision listed in the EMC Support Matrix on the
Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
NetWare PowerPath
• For CX200, CX400, CX600, or FC4700-Series storage systems
Version 3.0.0 with patch 3.0.1 or higher
• For CX300, CX500, CX700 storage systems
Version 3.0.1 or higher
• For FC4500 storage systems
Version 3.0.0 with patch 3.0.2 or higher
Refer to the EMC Support Matrix and the EMC PowerPath Release Notes for
UNIX on the Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com) for the
specific revision required for your NetWare version.
Prerequisites
◆
You must have a host that is
• Running an operating system that can support the Navisphere
Manager 6.X browser-based client. For an up-to-date list of
such operating systems, refer to the Navisphere Manager 6.X
release notes on http://powerlink.emc.com.
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system server
and that you will connect to the SPs in a CX200, CX300, CX400,
CX500, CX600, CX700, or FC4700-Series storage system.
◆
For most configurations, you must also have a host that is
• Running Navisphere CLI version 6.X
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system server
and that you will connect to SPs in CX200, CX300, CX400,
CX500, CX600, CX700, or FC4700-Series storage system.
◆
For an FC4500 storage system connected to a server on which you
will install PowerPath, you must have a computer that you can
connect to the storage system. This computer must run
• Windows 2000
• Navisphere Host Agent and CLI version 6.1 or higher
PowerPath Configurations for NetWare
4-3
NetWare Installation Checklists
◆
You must have planned your LUNs and RAID Groups, and
Storage Groups if you have Access Logix. Be sure to consider
requirements for SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and
MirrorView/A if you have this software. The following
documents will help you with this planning:
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System CX200-Series Configuration
Planning Guide (P/N 014003115)
• EMC CLARiiON CX300, CX500, CX500i, and CX700 Storage
Systems Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 300-001-273)
• EMC CX400-Series and CX600-Series Storage Systems
Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003113)
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System Model FC4700-2
Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003087)
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System Model FC4500, FC5300, and
FC5700 Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003039)
Documentation
Each checklist refers to some or all of the documents listed below. We
recommend that you load these documents on your service laptop or,
for an FC4500 or FC4700, on the computer you will connect to the
storage system, before starting the installation.
◆
Documentation that ships with
• HBA and HBA driver
This documentation is also available from the following QLogic
website:
http://www.qlogic.com/support/drivers_software.asp
and select EMC in the OEM-approved Drivers/Firmware list at the
bottom of the page.
• Switches and switch management software
• Novell NetWare operating system
4-4
◆
Removing ATF or CDE Software Before Installing Other Failover
Software (P/N 069001173)
◆
PowerPath Version 3.0 Product Guide (P/N 300-000-047)
◆
PowerPath Version 3.0 Installation and Administration Guide for
NetWare (P/N 300-000-513)
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
NetWare Installation Checklists
◆
EMC Navisphere Host Agent and CLI for NetWare Version 6.X
Installation Guide (P/N 069001149)
or
EMC CX-Series Server Software for NetWare Installation Guide
(P/N 300-002-040)
◆
EMC Navisphere Command Line Interface (CLI) Reference
(P/N 069001038)
◆
EMC Storage-System Host Utilities for NetWare Administrator’s
Guide (P/N 069001139)
◆
EMC SnapView Installation Guide (P/N 069001193, revision A02 or
higher)
◆
EMC SAN Copy Installation Guide (P/N 069001187)
◆
EMC Rails and Enclosures Field Installation Guide
(P/N 300-001-799)
◆
EMC Rails and Enclosures Installation Guide for 19-Inch NEMA
Cabinets (P/N 014003082) - for SPS installation only
◆
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2) CX200-Series Setup
and Cabling Guide (P/N 014003116) and EMC Storage Systems
CX200-Series Initialization Guide (P/N 014003117)
◆
EMC CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE) Setup Guide
(P/N 300-001-276, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-276, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2) CX400-Series Setup
and Cabling Guide (P/N 014003105) and EMC Storage Systems
CX400-Series and CX600-Series Initialization Guide
(P/N 014003112)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
PowerPath Configurations for NetWare
4-5
NetWare Installation Checklists
◆
EMC Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) CX600-Series Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 014003078) and EMC Storage Systems
CX400-Series and CX600-Series Initialization Guide
(P/N 014003112)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup
Guide (P/N 300-001-274, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-274), rev A01) and EMC CLARiiON
CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization Guide
(P/N 300-001-272)
4-6
◆
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk-Array Enclosure (DAE2) Setup and Cabling
Guide (P/N 014003104)
◆
FC4500 Setup Guide (P/N 014003102, revision A03 or higher)
◆
FC4700-2 Setup Guide (P/N 0140373)
◆
EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001125)
◆
EMC Navisphere Security Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001124)
◆
EMC Host Connectivity Guide for Novell NetWare (P/N 300-000-615)
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
NetWare Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — New NetWare Server and New Storage
System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be completed
before the service provider arrives.
Task
1
Server
Install HBAs and
driver
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install HBAs.
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 4-4)
CAUTION Do not connect cables to the HBAs until you are told to do so
later in this procedure.
❑ Verify HBA BIOS settings.
❑ Install HBA driver.
2
3
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to the values required for CLARiiON and
PowerPath.
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O delays.
Server
❑
Install PowerPath ❑
Make sure the SCSISAN.CDM module is not installed.
Host connectivity guide
and HBA documentation
(see URL on page 4-4)
NetWare documentation
Install PowerPath.
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath for
Note After PowerPath is installed on a NetWare 6 server, a device named NetWare installation and
EMC PowerPath Control Device appears under ConsoleOne > Tools >
administrator’s guide
Disk Management > Devices.This device is always inactive and is
PowerPath product
unavailable for I/O.
guide
CAUTION If you use the server -ns command to bring up NetWare, you
must either load the PowerPath driver manually or remove all redundant
paths. Failure to do so may result in LUN corruption.
PowerPath product
guide
❑ Install any PowerPath patches from the Software downloads page on the
EMC Powerlink website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
4
5
Server
Install Host
Agent or Server
Utility
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent or Navisphere Server Utility and the
Server
Install admsnap
❑ If the server will be a SnapView production or secondary host, install the
Navisphere CLI.
CX-Series Server
Software for NetWare
Installation Guide
admsnap utility.
PowerPath Checklist — New NetWare Server and New Storage System
4-7
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
6
Switches
Install
With Access Logix
Reference Document
For a SAN
Rails, cabinet, and
switch documentation
❑ Install switches, if not already installed.
❑ Connect a cable from each host HBA port to a switch port.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify the HBA connection to the switch by checking the
LED(s) for the switch port connected to the HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA is
logged in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
7
Storage System
Install
❑ Install the storage system in the cabinet, if not already installed.
8
Storage System
Initialize and
install software
enablers
❑ Install the Navisphere Initialization Utility on a host on the same subnet as Storage-system setup
the storage-system management ports.
guide
❑ Use the Navisphere Initialization Utility to initialize the storage system.
❑ If you have SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and/or MirrorView/A
software, install their enablers.
4-8
Rails and cabinet
documentation
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
9
Storage System
Cable to switch
or server and
LAN
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Connect the storage system to the switch or HBA ports.
Storage-system setup
guide.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the storage-system connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each SP
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the SP is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
❑ Cable each SP to the LAN connected to the hosts from which you will
manage the storage system.
10
11
Storage System
Set up security
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to define a global administrator and domain (if
not already defined) and any additional users.
Storage System ❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the following default
storage-system properties:
Set Properties for
PowerPath
navicli -h hostname systemtype -config 3
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
Navisphere CLI
reference
navicli -h hostname failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the
storage system.
12
Switches
Zone
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each HBA port (host initiator) to
Switch management
documentation
the appropriate SPs.
❑ If SAN Copy, MirrorView, or MirrorView/A is installed, create any required
zones.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify the switch
connections to the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — New NetWare Server and New Storage System
4-9
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
13
Server
Make target SPs
available
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Scan for LUNs with the following NetWare command:
NetWare documentation
scan all luns
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that each path has a LUNZ with the following
NetWare command:
list devices
❑ Stop and restart the Navisphere Host Agent or run the Navisphere Server CX-Series Server
Utility.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere Manager’s Connectivity Status dialog box
to verify that each HBA is registered with the storage system.
14
Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
Software for NetWare
Installation Guide
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide and
online help
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group
❑ Reboot the server.
NetWare should see DGC disk devices instead of LUNZ devices.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that PowerPath sees all the paths to the LUNs with
the following PowerPath command:
PowerPath product
guide
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your PowerPath license key if you have one.
• Verify that the storage-system properties are as defined in step 11.
15
16
4-10
Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
Server
Make LUNs
available to
NetWare
❑ Create partitions or the pertinent database file systems on the LUNs.
❑
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
your monitoring configuration.
If NetWare does not recognize any LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Host connectivity guide
or NetWare
documentation
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
17
With Access Logix
Server
If you have a PowerPath license key
Test PowerPath If your PowerPath license key is not registered, the load balancing policy is
with a license key restricted to basic failover.
Reference Document
NetWare documentation
❑ Stop all applications accessing the storage system and disable user logins
to the server.
❑ View the LUNs available to the server using the following PowerPath
command:
PowerPath product
guide
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to LUN by viewing the output of the powermt
display dev=x every=2 command, and disconnect the cable to that HBA.
17
Server
❑ View the output of the powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and
verify that
Test PowerPath
with a license key
• The state of the uncabled path(s) becomes “dead.”
(cont.)
• I/O continues to the remaining path(s) to the LUN, indicating that the
path failover was successful, and PowerPath is working properly.
PowerPath product
guide
❑ Reconnect the cable that you disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above steps exactly and caused any LUNs to
trespass, restore the LUNs to their original SP with the following
PowerPath command:
powermt restore
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — New NetWare Server and New Storage System
4-11
NetWare Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — New NetWare Server and Existing Storage
System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be completed
before the service provider arrives.
The Without Access Logix column does not apply to CX300, CX500, and
CX700 storage systems because they ship from the factory with the Access
Logix enabler installed.
Task
1
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install HBAs and
driver
Install HBAs.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install HBAs.
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 4-4)
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
❑ Verify HBA BIOS settings.
❑ Install HBA driver.
2
3
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to ❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to Host connectivity guide
Server
❑
Install PowerPath
the values required for CLARiiON
and PowerPath.
the values required for CLARiiON and HBA documentation
and PowerPath.
(see URL on page 4-4)
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
Make sure the SCSISAN.CDM
module is not installed.
❑ Install PowerPath.
Note After PowerPath is installed
on a NetWare 6 server, a device
named EMC PowerPath Control
Device appears under
ConsoleOne > Tools > Disk
Management > Devices.This
device is always inactive and is
unavailable for I/O.
4-12
❑ Install HBA driver.
❑ Make sure the SCSISAN.CDM
NetWare documentation
module is not installed.
❑ Install PowerPath.
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath for
Note After PowerPath is installed NetWare installation and
on a NetWare 6 server, a device administrator’s guide
named EMC PowerPath Control PowerPath product
Device appears under
guide
ConsoleOne > Tools > Disk
Management > Devices.This
device is always inactive and is
unavailable for I/O.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
3
4
5
6
With Access Logix
Server
Install PowerPath
(cont.)
Without Access Logix
CAUTION If you use the
server -ns command to bring up
NetWare, you must either load
the PowerPath driver manually or
remove all redundant paths.
Failure to do so may result in LUN
corruption.
Reference Document
CAUTION If you use the
server -ns command to bring up
NetWare, you must either load
the PowerPath driver manually or
remove all redundant paths.
Failure to do so may result in LUN
corruption.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
http://powerlink.emc.com
PowerPath product
guide
Server
Install Host
Agent or Server
Utility
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent ❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent CX-Series Server
Server
Install admsnap
❑ If the server will be a SnapView
Storage System
Update software
❑ If currently installed
or Navisphere Server Utility and
the Navisphere CLI.
or Navisphere Server Utility and
the Navisphere CLI.
Software for NetWare
Installation Guide
N/A
production or secondary host,
install the admsnap utility.
❑ If currently installed
storage-system software is not at
the required minimum revision
(see page 4-3), update it.
Navisphere Manager
storage-system software is not at administrator’s guide
the required minimum revision
and online help
(see page 4-3), update it.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access
to data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access
to data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
PowerPath Checklist — New NetWare Server and Existing Storage System
4-13
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
7
8
With Access Logix
Server
Cable to
switches or
storage system
Switches
Zone
Without Access Logix
❑ Cable the HBA ports to the switch ❑ Cable the HBA ports to the switch Storage-system setup
connected to the storage system
or to SP ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
connected to the storage system
or to SP ports.
the storage-system connections
to the switch by checking the
LED(s) for the switch port
connected to each HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which
indicates that a 1-Gbit SP port
is logged in to the switch port.
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which
indicates that a 1-Gbit SP port
is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
For a SAN
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
path from each HBA port (host
initiator) to the appropriate SPs.
❑ If SAN Copy, MirrorView, or
MIrrorView A is installed, create
any required zones.zones.
❑
Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
guide.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
the HBA connection s to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for
the switch port connected to each
HBA port.
path from each HBA port (host
initiator) to the appropriate SPs.
4-14
Reference Document
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Switch management
documentation
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
9
Storage System
Register HBAs
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ On the server, restart the
N/A
CX-Series Server
Software for NetWare
Installation Guide
Navisphere Host Agent or run the
Navisphere Server Utility.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Manager’s Connectivity Status
dialog box to verify that each HBA
is registered with the storage
system.
10 Storage System
Set Properties
for PowerPath
For a CX200, CX300, CX400, CX500, For a CX200, CX300, CX400, CX500, Navisphere Manager
CX600, CX700, or FC4700-Series
administrator’s guide
CX600, CX700, or FC4700-Series
storage system
and online help or
storage system
Navisphere CLI
❑ Use Navisphere Manager’s
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
reference
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
command to determine the
from the Tools menu on the
default storage-system type:
toolbar) to set the following
navicli -h hostname systemtype
storage-system properties for the
where hostname is the IP
server’s HBA ports (initiators):
address or network name of an
Initiator Type to CLARiiON Open
SP in the storage system.
Failover mode to 1
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Array commpath to Enabled
Open), use the following
Unit Serial Number to LUN
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the default
failover mode and array
commpath properties to the
values for PowerPath:
navicli -h hostname
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — New NetWare Server and Existing Storage System
4-15
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
10 Storage System
Set Properties
for PowerPath
(cont.)
For an FC4500 storage system
For an FC4500 storage system
Storage-system setup
guide
❑ Connect a computer to the serial ❑ Connect a computer to the serial
port on the storage system.
port on the storage system
❑ From the computer connected to ❑ From the computer connected to Navisphere CLI
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s HBA ports (initiators):
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -type 3
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -arraycommpath 1
where
device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
servername is the name of the
server with the HBAs.
the storage system’s serial port, reference
use the following Navisphere CLI
command to determine the
default storage-system type:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype
where
device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype -config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
❑ From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
4-16
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
11 Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Scan for LUNs with the following
❑ Scan for LUNs with the following
NetWare documentation
NetWare command:
NetWare command:
scan all luns
scan all luns
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that each
each LUN with the following
NetWare command:
list devices
list devices
❑ Stop and restart the Navisphere
Host Agent or run the Navisphere
Server Utility.
12 Storage System
Configure
❑ Checkpoint - Verify the paths to
path has a LUNZ with the
following NetWare command:
❑ Stop and restart the Navisphere
CX-Series Server
Host Agent or run the Navisphere Software for NetWare
Server Utility.
Installation Guide
❑ If the server will use an existing
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage Group, use Navisphere
Manager to connect the server to
the Storage Group.
❑ If the server will use a new
Storage Group, use Navisphere
Manager to create RAID Groups,
bind LUNs, create the Storage
Group, and assign LUNs to the
Storage Group.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
connect the server to the Storage
Group.
❑ Reboot the server.
❑ Reboot the server.
PowerPath Checklist — New NetWare Server and Existing Storage System
4-17
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
12 Storage System ❑
Configure (cont.)
Checkpoint - Verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs with the following
PowerPath command:
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
PowerPath product
guide
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs with the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection
to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 10.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 10.
For an FC4500 storage system
For an FC4500 storage system
❑ Disconnect the computer from
❑ Disconnect the computer from
the serial port on the storage
system.
❑ Plan your monitoring
configuration.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set
user options, create templates,
and set up your monitoring
configuration.
14 Server
Make LUNs
available to
NetWare
Reference Document
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
13 Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
Without Access Logix
❑ If the storage system has any
existing volumes that you want
the server to use, mount them.
the serial port on the storage
system.
❑ Plan your monitoring
configuration.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
user options, create templates,
and set up your monitoring
configuration.
❑ If the storage system has any
NetWare documentation
existing volumes that you want
the server to use, mount them.
❑ Prepare any new LUNs to receive ❑ Prepare any new LUNs to receive Host connectivity guide
data by creating partitions or the
pertinent database file systems
on them.
data by creating partitions or the
pertinent database file systems
on them.
If NetWare does not recognize
any LUNs, verify the connection
to the Storage Group.
4-18
Storage-system setup
guide
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
or NetWare
documentation
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
15 Server
Save PowerPath
configuration
❑ Save the server’s PowerPath
❑ Save the server’s PowerPath
PowerPath product
guide
16 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
configuration with the following
PowerPath command:
configuration with the following
PowerPath command:
powermt -save
powermt -save
This command creates the
powermt.ctm configuration file.
This command creates the
powermt.ctm configuration file.
If you have a PowerPath license key If you have a PowerPath license key NetWare documentation
If your PowerPath license key is not
If your PowerPath license key is not
registered, the load balancing policy is registered, the load balancing policy is
restricted to basic failover.
restricted to basic failover.
❑ Stop all applications accessing
❑ Stop all applications accessing
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
❑ View the LUNs available to the
❑ View the LUNs available to the
server using the following
PowerPath command:
server using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to
❑ Choose one available LUN to
receive I/O for the test.
receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen
❑ View the paths to the chosen
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
PowerPath product
guide
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
PowerPath Checklist — New NetWare Server and Existing Storage System
4-19
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
16 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key (cont.)
❑ View the output of the powermt
❑ View the output of the powermt
PowerPath product
guide
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP using
the following PowerPath
command:
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP using
the following PowerPath
command:
powermt restore
powermt restore
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
4-20
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
NetWare Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and New Storage
System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be performed
before the service provider arrives, except for the removal of ATF or
CDE, which you can have done by EMC Professional Services.
!
CAUTION
EMC no longer supports ATF or CDE. Before you transition your
server from ATF or CDE to PowerPath, you must
◆
Back up your server configurations.
◆
Back up data on all storage systems connected to the server.
◆
Remove ATF or CDE, which EMC recommends that EMC
Professional Services do, especially if your server configuration
is complex. If you want to remove it yourself, you must use the
procedure in the Removing ATF or CDE Software Before
Installing Other Failover Software document (P/N 069001173),
which is on the Powerlink website with this roadmap.
Simply removing ATF or CDE using the uninstall procedure in
the NetWare ATF administrator’s guide or the Netware utilities
administrator’s guide may not return the server to its original
state, and may result in lost data.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and New Storage System
4-21
NetWare Installation Checklists
.
Task
1
With Access Logix
Server
Install additional
HBAs
Reference Document
❑ If you need additional HBAs to provide more paths to the storage system, HBA documentation
install these HBAs.
(see URL on page 4-4)
CAUTION Do not connect cables to the HBAs until you are told to do so
later in this procedure.
❑ Verify HBA BIOS settings.
2
Server
Prepare cluster
If the server is in a cluster
NetWare documentation
❑ Move cluster resources from server you want to upgrade.
❑ If the server is not running ULDNCS, remove the first from the cluster with
the following command:
cluster leave
❑ Unload cluster software with the following command:
uldncs
3
Server and Client ❑
Remove ATF or
CDE
4
Server
Update Software
If ATF or CDE is installed, then before continuing either remove it yourself Removing ATF or CDE
(see caution before this checklist) or arrange to have EMC Professional
Services remove it.
❑ If the following software is currently installed and not at the required
minimum revision (see page 4-3), update it:
• HBA driver
• Navisphere Host Agent
• admsnap
5
4-22
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
❑ Make sure the HBA driver parameters are set to the values required for
CLARiiON and PowerPath.
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O delays.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 4-4),
CX-Series Server
Software for NetWare
Installation Guide
Host connectivity guide
and HBA documentation
(see URL on page 4-4)
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
6
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Make sure the SCSISAN.CDM module is not installed.
Reference Document
NetWare documentation
❑ If the Navisphere Host Agent is running, unload the Navagent.nml driver CX-Series Server
with the following NetWare command:
unload navagent
Software for NetWare
Installation Guide
❑ Install PowerPath.
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath for
Note After PowerPath is installed on a NetWare 6 server, a device named NetWare installation and
EMC PowerPath Control Device appears under ConsoleOne > Tools >
administrator’s guide
Disk Management > Devices.This device is always inactive and is
unavailable for I/O.
CAUTION If you use the server -ns command to bring up NetWare, you
must either load the PowerPath driver manually or remove all redundant
paths. Failure to do so may result in LUN corruption.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches from the Software downloads page on the
EMC Powerlink website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
7
Storage System
Install
❑ Install the storage system in the cabinet, if not already installed.
8
Storage System
Initialize and
install software
enablers
❑ Install the Navisphere Initialization Utility on a host on the same subnet as Storage-system setup
the storage-system management ports.
software, install their enablers.
Storage System
Cable to switch
or server and
LAN
guide
❑ Use the Navisphere Initialization Utility to initialize the storage system.
❑ If you have SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and/or MirrorView/A
9
Rails and cabinet
documentation
❑ Connect the storage system to the switch or HBA ports.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage-system setup
guide.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the storage-system connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each SP
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the SP is logged
in to the switch port.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and New Storage System
4-23
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
9
With Access Logix
Storage System
Cable to switch
or server and
LAN (cont.)
Reference Document
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
❑ Cable each SP to the LAN connected to the hosts from which you will
manage the storage system.
10 Storage System
Set up security
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to define a global administrator and domain (if
11 Storage System ❑
Set Properties for
PowerPath
not already defined) and any additional users.
Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the following default
storage-system properties:
Storage-system setup
guide.
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
Navisphere CLI
reference
navicli -h hostname systemtype -config 3
navicli -h hostname failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the
storage system.
12 Server
❑
Cable additional
HBAs to switches
❑
or storage
system
Cable any additional HBA ports to the switch connected to the storage
system or to SP ports.
Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the HBA connections to the switch by
checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each additional HBA
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA port is
logged in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
4-24
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Storage-system setup
guide
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
13 Switches
Zone additional
HBAs
For a SAN
Switch management
documentation
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each additional HBA port (host
initiator) to the SPs.
❑ If SAN Copy, MirrorView, or MirrorView/A is installed, create any required
zones.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify the switch
connections to the storage system.
14 Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Scan for LUNs with the following NetWare command:
NetWare documentation
scan all luns
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that each path has a LUNZ with the following
NetWare command:
list devices
❑ Restart Navisphere Agent or run Navisphere Server Utility.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere Manager’s Connectivity Status dialog box
to verify that each HBA is registered with the storage system.
15 Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
CX-Series Server
Software for NetWare
Installation Guide
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group
❑ Reboot the server.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that PowerPath sees all the paths to the LUNs using
the following PowerPath command:
PowerPath product
guide
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your PowerPath license key if you have one.
• Verify that the storage-system properties are as defined in step 11.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and New Storage System
4-25
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
16 Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
❑
Reference Document
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
your monitoring configuration.
17 Server
If the server is in a cluster
NetWare documentation
Move server back ❑ Load cluster software on the server with the following NetWare command:
into cluster
ldncs
❑ Move cluster resources back to the server.
18 Server
Make LUNs
available to
NetWare
❑ Create partitions or the pertinent database file systems on the LUNs.
19 Server
Save PowerPath
configuration
❑ Save the server’s PowerPath configuration with the following PowerPath
If NetWare does not recognize any LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
command:
Host connectivity guide
or NetWare
documentation
PowerPath product
guide
powermt -save
This command creates the powermt.ctm configuration file.
20 Server
If you have a PowerPath license key
Test PowerPath If your PowerPath license key is not registered, the load balancing policy is
with a license key restricted to basic failover.
❑ View the LUNs available to the server using the PowerPath command
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to LUN by viewing the output of the powermt
display dev=x every=2 command, and disconnect the cable to that HBA.
4-26
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
NetWare documentation
PowerPath product
guide
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
20 Server
❑
Test PowerPath
with a license key
(cont.)
Reference Document
View the output of the powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and
verify that
• The state of the uncabled path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining path(s) to the LUN, indicating that the
path failover was successful, and PowerPath is working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above steps exactly and caused any LUNs to
trespass, restore the LUNs to their original SP with the following
PowerPath command:
PowerPath product
guide
powermt restore
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and New Storage System
4-27
NetWare Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and Existing
Storage System
This checklist assumes that the existing NetWare server and existing
storage system are already connected in a SAN or direct attach
configuration. Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be
performed before the service provider arrives, except for the removal
of ATF or CDE, which you can have done by EMC Professional
Services.
!
CAUTION
EMC no longer supports ATF or CDE. Before you transition your
server from ATF or CDE to PowerPath, you must
◆
Back up your server configurations.
◆
Back up data on all storage systems connected to the server.
◆
Remove ATF or CDE, which EMC recommends that EMC
Professional Services do, especially if your server configuration
is complex. If you want to remove it yourself, you must use the
procedure in the Removing ATF or CDE Software Before
Installing Other Failover Software document (P/N 069001173),
which is on the Powerlink website with this roadmap.
Simply removing ATF or CDE using the uninstall procedure in
the NetWare ATF administrator’s guide or the NetWare utilities
administrator’s guide may not return the server to its original
state, and may result in lost data.
If you are transitioning a NetWare Cluster Service configuration from
ATF or CDE to PowerPath, perform the procedure in the checklist on
each node in succession. While you perform the procedure on one
node, you can leave the cluster services active on the other node,
provided failure in a path to the storage system does not occur.
4-28
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
NetWare Installation Checklists
The Without Access Logix column does not apply to CX300, CX500, and
CX700 storage systems because they ship from the factory with the Access
Logix enabler installed.
Task
1
2
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install additional
HBAs
Server
Prepare cluster
Without Access Logix
If you need additional HBAs to
❑
provide more paths to the storage
system, install these HBAs.
If you need additional HBAs to
provide more paths to the storage
system, install these HBAs.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to do
so later in this procedure.
If the server is in a cluster
If the server is in a cluster
❑ Move cluster resources from
❑ Move cluster resources from
server you want to upgrade.
server you want to upgrade.
Reference Document
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 4-4)
NetWare
documentation
❑ Remove the first from the cluster ❑ Remove the first from the cluster
with the following command:
with the following command:
cluster leave
cluster leave
❑ Unload cluster software with the
❑ Unload cluster software with the
following command:
following command:
uldncs
uldncs
If ATF or CDE is installed, then
before continuing either remove it
yourself (see caution before this
checklist) or arrange to have EMC
Professional Services remove it.
3
Server and Client ❑
Remove ATF or
CDE
If ATF or CDE is installed, then
❑
before continuing either remove it
yourself (see caution before this
checklist) or arrange to have
EMC Professional Services
remove it.
4
Server
❑
Update Software
If the following software is
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision (see
page 4-3), update it:
• HBA driver
• Navisphere Host Agent
• admsnap
Removing ATF or CDE
instruction sheet
❑ If the following software is currently HBA documentation
installed and not at the required
minimum revision (see page 4-3),
update it:
• HBA driver
• Navisphere Host Agent
(see URL on page 4-4),
CX-Series Server
Software for NetWare
Installation Guide
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and Existing Storage System
4-29
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
5
6
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
Storage System
Update software
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Make sure the HBA driver
❑ Make sure the HBA driver
Host connectivity guide
and HBA
documentation (see
URL on page 4-4)
parameters are set to the values
required for CLARiiON and
PowerPath.
parameters are set to the values
required for CLARiiON and
PowerPath.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
CAUTION Using improper settings
can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O
delays.
❑ If currently installed
Navisphere Manager
storage-system software is not at administrator’s guide
the required minimum revision (see and online help
page 4-3), update it.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access
to data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP are
down.
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
step 8.
7
4-30
❑ If currently installed
storage-system software is not at
the required minimum revision
(see page 4-3), update it.
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
step 8.
CX200, CX300, For new HBAs
For any HBAs
Navisphere CLI
CX400, CX500,
reference
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI ❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
CX600, CX700,
command to determine the
command to determine the default
or FC4700-Series
default storage-system type:
storage-system type:
Storage System
navicli -h hostname systemtype
navicli -h hostname systemtype
Set properties for
PowerPath
where hostname is the IP
where hostname is the IP address
address or network name of an
or network name of an SP in the
SP in the storage system.
storage system.
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set it
to 3:
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same time.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
7
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
CX200, CX300, For new HBAs (cont.)
For any HBAs (cont.)
Navisphere CLI
CX400, CX500,
reference
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI ❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
CX600, CX700,
commands to set the following
commands to set the following
or FC4700-Series
default storage-system
default storage-system properties:
Storage System
properties:
navicli -h hostname failovermode
Set properties for
hostname
1
navicli
-h
PowerPath
failovermode 1
(cont.)
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address
where hostname is the IP
or network name of an SP in the
address or network name of an
storage system.
SP in the storage system.
For existing HBAs
An existing HBA is one that is
registered with the storage system.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager’s
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA ports
(initiators):
Initiator Type to CLARiiON Open
Failover mode to 1
Array commpath to Enabled
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and Existing Storage System
4-31
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
8
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
FC4500 Storage ❑ Connect a computer to the serial ❑ Connect a computer to the serial
System
port on the storage system.
port on the storage system.
Set properties for
For new HBAs
For any HBAs
PowerPath
❑ From the computer connected to ❑ From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
use the following Navisphere CLI
command to determine the
command to determine the default
default storage-system type:
storage-system type:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype -config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
navicli -np -d device systemtype
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set it
to 3:
navicli -np -d device systemtype
-config 3
CAUTION The above command reboots
both SPs at the same time.
❑ From the computer connected to ❑ From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
4-32
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system properties:
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide
Navisphere CLI
reference
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
8
With Access Logix
FC4500 Storage
System
Set properties for
PowerPath
(cont.)
For existing HBAs
An existing HBA is one that is
registered with the storage system.
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Navisphere CLI
reference
❑ From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA existing
ports (initiators):
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -type 3
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -arraycommpath 1
where
device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
servername is the name of the
server with the HBAs
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and Existing Storage System
4-33
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
9
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Make sure the SCSISAN.CDM
module is not installed.
❑ Make sure the SCSISAN.CDM
NetWare
documentation
❑ If the Navisphere Host Agent is
❑ If the Navisphere Host Agent is
Server
❑
Install PowerPath
module is not installed.
running, unload the
Navagent.nlm driver with the
command
running, stop it by unloading the
Navagent.nlm driver with the
command
unload navagent
unload navagent
❑ Install PowerPath.
❑ Install PowerPath.
Note After PowerPath is installed
on a NetWare 6 server, a device
named EMC PowerPath Control
Device appears under
ConsoleOne > Tools > Disk
Management > Devices.This
device is always inactive and is
unavailable for I/O.
Note After PowerPath is installed
on a NetWare 6 server, a device
named EMC PowerPath Control
Device appears under
ConsoleOne > Tools > Disk
Management > Devices.This
device is always inactive and is
unavailable for I/O.
CAUTION If you use the
server -ns command to bring up
NetWare, you must either load
the PowerPath driver manually or
remove all redundant paths.
Failure to do so may result in LUN
corruption.
CAUTION If you use the
server -ns command to bring up
NetWare, you must either load the
PowerPath driver manually or
remove all redundant paths.
Failure to do so may result in LUN
corruption.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
❑ Install any PowerPath patches from
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
the Software downloads page on
the EMC Powerlink website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
http://powerlink.emc.com
4-34
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
CX-Series Server
Software for NetWare
Installation Guide
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath
for NetWare installation
and administrator’s
guide
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
10 Server
Cable additional
HBAs to
switches or
storage system
❑ Cable any additional HBA ports to ❑ Cable any additional HBA ports to Storage-system setup
the switch connected to the
storage system or to SP ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the switch
port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which
indicates that a 1-Gbit SP port
is logged in to the switch port.
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged in
to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which indicates
that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged
in to the switch port.
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
❑ Reboot the server.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
Manager’s Connectivity Status
dialog box to verify that each new
HBA is registered with the
storage system.
guide.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED is
off, which indicates that a 2-Gbit
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a SAN
path from each additional HBA
port (host initiator) to the SPs.
Reference Document
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the
HBA connections to the switch by
checking the LED(s) for the switch
port connected to each additional
HBA port.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
12 Server
Register
additional HBAs
with storage
system
the switch connected to the
storage system or to SP ports.
the HBA connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for
the switch port connected to each
additional HBA port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
11 Switches
Zone for
additional HBAs
Without Access Logix
Switch management
documentation
path from each additional HBA port
(host initiator) to the SPs.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify the
switch connections to the storage
system.
❑ Reboot the server.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and Existing Storage System
4-35
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
13 Server
Make LUNs
available to
additional HBAs
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
N/A
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
14 Server
Verify paths to
storage system
❑ Checkpoint - Verify the paths to
❑ Checkpoint - Verify the paths to
each LUN with the following
NetWare command:
each LUN with the following
NetWare command:
list devices
list devices
disconnect and then reconnect
the server and its Storage Group.
❑ Reboot the server
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that
PowerPath sees the paths to
each LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
PowerPath product
PowerPath sees the paths to each guide
LUN using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection
to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 7 or 8.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in step
7 or 8
For an FC4500 storage system
For an FC4500 storage system
❑ Disconnect the computer from
❑ Disconnect the computer from the
the serial port on the storage
system.
4-36
NetWare
documentation
serial port on the storage system.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Storage-system setup
guide
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
15 Server
Remount
volumes
If the server is not in a cluster
If the server is not in a cluster
❑ Remount the volumes on the
❑ Remount the volumes on the
NetWare
documentation
storage system.
storage system.
If the server is in a cluster
If the server is in a cluster
❑ Load cluster software on the
❑ Load cluster software on the server
server with the following
command:
with the following command:
ldncs
ldncs
❑ Move cluster resources back to
the server.
16 Server
Save PowerPath
configuration
17 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
❑ Save the server’s PowerPath
❑ Move cluster resources back to the
server.
❑ Save the server’s PowerPath
configuration with the following
PowerPath command:
configuration with the following
PowerPath command:
powermt -save
powermt -save
This command creates the
powermt.ctm configuration file.
This command creates the
powermt.ctm configuration file.
If you have a PowerPath license key If you have a PowerPath license key
If your PowerPath license key is not
If your PowerPath license key is not
registered, the load balancing policy is registered, the load balancing policy is
restricted to basic failover.
restricted to basic failover.
❑ Stop all applications accessing
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
NetWare
documentation
❑ Stop all applications accessing the
storage system and disable user
logins to the server.
❑ View the LUNs available to the
❑ View the LUNs available to the
server using the following
PowerPath command:
server using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to
❑ Choose one available LUN to
receive I/O for the test.
receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
PowerPath product
guide
PowerPath product
guide
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing NetWare Server and Existing Storage System
4-37
NetWare Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
17 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key (cont.)
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
PowerPath product
guide
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt
❑ View the output of the powermt
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
display dev=x every=2 command,
and verify that
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
4-38
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
powermt restore
powermt restore
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
5
Invisible Body Tag
Solaris Installation
Checklists
This chapter contains checklists of the tasks required to install an
CLARiiON system in a configuration with a Solaris™ server and
PowerPath or VERITAS DMP failover software.
The sections for the different configurations are
◆
◆
PowerPath Configurations for Solaris ............................................5-2
DMP Configurations for Solaris ....................................................5-45
Solaris Installation Checklists
5-1
Solaris Installation Checklists
PowerPath Configurations for Solaris
Read this section if you are installing a Solaris PowerPath
configuration with a new or existing server and a new or existing
storage system. A new and existing server and a new and existing
storage system are defined as follows:
new server - A server running Solaris and not connected to any
storage system.
existing server - A server running Solaris and that is already
connected to one or more storage systems.
new storage system - A CX300, CX500, or CX700 storage system that
has the factory default settings and has never been connected to a
server.
existing storage system - CX300, CX400, CX500, CX600, CX700,
FC4500, or FC4700-Series that is already connected to one or more
servers and is in a Navisphere domain.
All CLARiiON storage systems connected to the server must be CX300,
CX400, CX500, CX600, CX700, FC4500, FC4700-Series, or FC5300
storage systems. If any other type of CLARiiON storage system is connected
to the server, the server cannot run PowerPath.
Topics relating to the checklists for Solaris PowerPath configurations
are
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
5-2
Required Host Software Revisions.................................................. 5-3
Prerequisites ....................................................................................... 5-3
Documentation................................................................................... 5-4
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and New Storage
System.................................................................................................. 5-8
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and Existing Storage
System................................................................................................ 5-14
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and New Storage
System................................................................................................ 5-25
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and Existing
Storage System ................................................................................. 5-32
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Solaris Installation Checklists
Required Host
Software Revisions
◆
Solaris operating system revision and patches listed in the EMC
Support Matrix on the Powerlink website
(http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
HBA driver revision listed in the EMC Support Matrix on the
Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
Solaris PowerPath
• For CX400, CX600, FC4500, and FC4700-Series storage systems
Version 3.0.0 with Patch 3.0.2 or higher, except for Solaris 9,
which requires PowerPath 3.0.3 or higher
• For CX300, CX500, and CX700 storage systems
Version 3.0.4 or higher
Refer to the EMC Support Matrix and the EMC PowerPath Release Notes for
UNIX on the Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com) for the
specific revision required for your Solaris version.
Prerequisites
◆
You must have a host that is
• Running an operating system that can support the Navisphere
Manager 6.X browser-based client. For an up-to-date list of
such operating systems, refer to the Navisphere Manager 6.X
release notes on http://powerlink.emc.com.
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system server
and that you will connect to the SPs in CX300, CX400,CX500,
CX600, CX700, or FC4700-Series storage system.
◆
For most configurations, you must also have a host that is
• Running Navisphere 6.X
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system server
and that you will connect to SPs in CX300, CX400, CX500,
CX600, CX700, or FC4700-Series storage system.
◆
For an FC4500 storage system connected to a server on which you
will install PowerPath, you must have a computer that you can
connect to the storage system. This computer must run
• Windows 2000
• Navisphere Host Agent and CLI version 6.1 or higher.
PowerPath Configurations for Solaris
5-3
Solaris Installation Checklists
◆
You must have planned your LUNs and RAID Groups, and
Storage Groups if you have Access Logix. Be sure to consider
requirements for SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and
MirrorView/A if you have this software. The following
documents will help you with this planning:
• EMC CLARiiON CX300, CX500, CX500i, and CX700 Storage
Systems Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 300-001-273)
• EMC CX400-Series and CX600-Series Storage Systems
Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003113)
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System Model FC4700-2
Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003087)
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System Model FC4500, FC5300, and
FC5700 Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003039)
Documentation
Each checklist refers to some or all of the documents listed below. We
recommend that you load these documents on your service laptop or,
for an FC4500 or FC4700, on the computer you will connect to the
storage system, before starting the installation.
◆
Documentation that ships with the HBA and HBA driver.
This documentation is also available from the following websites
For Emulex HBAs and drivers:
http://www.emulex.com/ts/docoem/framemc.htm
For QLogic HBAs and drivers:
http://www.qlogic.com/support/drivers_software.asp
and select EMC in the OEM-approved Drivers/Firmware list at the
bottom of the page.
◆
Documentation that ships with the
• Switches and switch management software
• Solaris operating system
◆
5-4
Removing ATF or CDE Software Before Installing Other Failover
Software (P/N 069001173)
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Solaris Installation Checklists
◆
PowerPath Version 4.3 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-673)
or
PowerPath Version 4.2 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-521)
or
PowerPath Version 4.1 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-290)
or
PowerPath Version 4.0 Product Guide (P/N 300-000-979)
or
PowerPath Version 3.0 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-047)
◆
PowerPath for Solaris Version 4.3 Installation and Administration
Guide (P/N 300-001-681)
or
PowerPath for Solaris Version 4.2 Installation and Administration
Guide (P/N 300-001-528)
or
PowerPath Version 4.1 for Solaris Installation and Administration
Guide (P/N 300-001-293)
or
PowerPath Version 4.0 for UNIX Installation and Administration
Guide (P/N 300-000-978)
or
PowerPath Version 3.0 for UNIX Installation and Administration
Guide (P/N 300-000-511)
◆
EMC Navisphere Agent and CLI for Solaris Version 5.X Installation
Guide (P/N 069001150)
or
EMC CX-Series Server Software for Solaris Installation Guide
(P/N300-002-039)
◆
EMC Navisphere Command Line Interface (CLI) Reference
(P/N 069001038)
◆
Storage-System Host Utilities for Solaris Administrator’s Guide
(P/N 069001140)
◆
EMC SnapView Installation Guide (P/N 069001193, revision A02 or
higher)
◆
EMC SAN Copy Installation Guide (P/N 069001187)
PowerPath Configurations for Solaris
5-5
Solaris Installation Checklists
◆
EMC Rails and Enclosures Field Installation Guide
(P/N 300-001-799)
◆
EMC Rails and Enclosures Installation Guide for 19-Inch NEMA
Cabinets (P/N 014003082) - for SPS installation only
◆
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2) CX200-Series Setup
and Cabling Guide (P/N 014003116) and EMC Storage Systems
CX200-Series Initialization Guide (P/N 014003117)
◆
EMC CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE) Setup Guide
(P/N 300-001-276, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-276, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2) CX400-Series Setup
and Cabling Guide (P/N 014003105) and EMC Storage Systems
CX400-Series and CX600-Series Initialization Guide
(P/N 014003112)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) CX600-Series Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 014003078) and EMC Storage Systems
CX400-Series and CX600-Series Initialization Guide
(P/N 014003112)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup
Guide (P/N 300-001-274, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-274), rev A01) and EMC CLARiiON
CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization Guide
(P/N 300-001-272)
◆
5-6
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk-Array Enclosure (DAE2) Setup and Cabling
Guide (P/N 014003104)
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Solaris Installation Checklists
◆
FC4500 Setup Guide (P/N 014003102, revision A03 or higher)
◆
FC4700-2 Setup Guide (P/N 014003073)
◆
EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001125)
◆
EMC Navisphere Security Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001124)
◆
EMC Host Connectivity Guide for Sun Solaris (P/N 300-000-607)
PowerPath Configurations for Solaris
5-7
Solaris Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and New Storage
System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be completed
before the service provider arrives.
Task
1
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install HBAs and
driver
Install HBAs.
CAUTION Do not connect cables to the HBAs until you are told to do so
later in this procedure.
Reference Document
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 5-4)
❑ Install HBA driver.
2
Server
Set HBA driver
properties
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters, except for the persistent bindings, to the
values required for CLARiiON and PowerPath.
Solaris host
connectivity guide
You will set the persistent bindings after the storage system is installed
and the switches are zoned.
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 5-4)
For an Emulex HBA driver, be sure to set the following parameter:
no-device-delay=0
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O delays.
3
Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Install PowerPath.
❑ If you have a PowerPath license key, register it.
❑ Reboot the server to complete the installation of PowerPath.
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath
for UNIX installation
and administrator’s
guide
❑ Install any PowerPath patches from the Software downloads page on the
EMC Powerlink website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
4
5
5-8
Server
Install Host
Agent or Server
Utility
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent or Navisphere Server Utility and the
Server
Install admsnap
❑ If the server will be a SnapView production or secondary host, install the
Navisphere CLI.
admsnap utility.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
CX-Series Server
Software for Solaris
Installation Guide
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
6
Switches
Install
With Access Logix
Reference Document
For a SAN
Rails, cabinet, switch
documentation.
❑ Install switches, if not already installed.
❑ Connect a cable from each host HBA port to a switch port.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify the HBA connection to the switch by checking the
LED(s) for the switch port connected to the HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA is
logged in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gigabit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
7
Storage System
Install
❑ Install the storage system in the cabinet, if not already installed.
8
Storage System
Initialize and
install software
enablers
❑ Install the Navisphere Initialization Utility on a host on the same subnet as Storage-system setup
the storage-system management ports.
Rails and cabinet
documentation
guide
❑ Use the Navisphere Initialization Utility to initialize the storage system.
❑ If you have SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and/or MirrorView/A
software, install their enablers.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and New Storage System
5-9
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
9
With Access Logix
Storage System ❑
Cable to switch or
server and LAN
Connect the storage system to the switch or HBA ports.
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the storage-system connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each SP
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the SP is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gigabit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
❑ Cable each SP to the LAN connected to the hosts from which you will
manage the storage system.
10 Storage System
Set up security
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to define a global administrator and domain (if
11 Storage System
Set Properties
for PowerPath
❑ Use the following the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the
not already defined) and any additional users.
following default storage-system properties to the values for PowerPath:
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
Navisphere CLI
reference
navicli -h hostname systemtype -config 3
navicli -h hostname failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
navicli -h hostname unitserialnumber lun (only for server in a Sun
Cluster; it must left at the default setting for all other cases)
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the
storage system.
12 Switches
Zone
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each HBA port (host initiator) to
the appropriate SPs.
❑ If SAN Copy, MirrorView, or MirrorView/A is installed, create any required
zones.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify the switch
connections to the storage system.
5-10
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Switch management
documentation
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
13 Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Add persistent bindings to the HBA driver configuration file.
Solaris utilities kit
administrator’s guide
❑ Edit the /kernel/drv/sd.conf file to add LUNs and their targets.
Solaris driver.conf
man page
❑ Reboot the server using the reboot - - -r command so the HBA can see
the targets (SPs).
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that each HBA sees only the targets (SPs) to which it Solaris documentation
is zoned.
❑ Checkpoint - Use the inquiry option of the format command to verify that
each path to the storage system has one arraycommpath device with an
ID of drive type unknown.
The output of this command should be Vendor DGC, Product LUNZ.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere Manager’s Connectivity Status dialog box Navisphere Manager
14 Storage System
Configure
to verify that each HBA is registered with the storage system.
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group
❑ Reboot the server using the reboot - - -r command so that Solaris
recognizes the LUNs.
Now the LUNs in the Storage Group look like any other disks in the server.
❑ Checkpoint - Use the format command to verify that Solaris recognizes
Solaris documentation
the LUNs.
If Solaris does not recognize any LUNs, verify the server’s connection to
the Storage Group.
15 Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
❑
Manager
administrator’s guide
Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
your monitoring configuration.
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and New Storage System
5-11
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
16 Server
Make LUNs
available to
Solaris
❑ Prepare the LUNs to receive data by
Solaris host
connectivity guide or
Solaris documentation
• Specifying Solaris mount point names for them
• Labeling and partitioning them
• Mounting file systems on them
• Mounting them to the mount points
17 Server
Configure
PowerPath for
missing devices
❑ Use the following PowerPath commands to configure PowerPath for any
missing logical devices so all paths to LUNs are visible:
PowerPath product
guide
powercf -i or powercf -q
powermt config
❑ Checkpoint - Use the following PowerPath command to verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to the LUNs:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
If PowerPath cannot see all the paths, verify that
• You registered your PowerPath license key if you have one.
• the storage-system properties are set as defined in step 11.
18 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
If you have a PowerPath license key
Note If your PowerPath license key is not registered, the load balancing policy
is restricted to basic failover.
❑ Stop all applications accessing the storage system and disable user logins
to the server.
❑ View the LUNs available to the server using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN using the PowerPath following
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that represents the chosen LUN.
5-12
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
PowerPath product
guide
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
18 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key (cont.)
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
Reference Document
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to LUN by viewing the output of the powermt PowerPath product
display dev=x every=2 command, and disconnect the cable to that HBA. guide
❑ View the output of the powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and
verify that
• The state of the uncabled paths becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining path(s) to the LUN, indicating that the
path failover was successful, and PowerPath is working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above steps exactly and caused any LUNs to
trespass, restore the LUNs to their original SP with the following
PowerPath command:
powermt restore
19 Server
VERITAS VxVM
For a server with VERITAS VxVM V3.1.1 or below
❑ Before you reboot the server, edit the /etc/rcS.d/S24powerstartup file to
add the following two lines to the bottom of the file after the last fi
character:
/etc/powermt set volume_open_policy=firstpath
echo "PowerPath:powermt set volume_open_policy=firstpath"
VERITAS VxVM
documentation and
EMC manual on
installing and
configuring EMP power
devices with Solaris
applications
On the next reboot, the first path policy used by CLARiiON storage
systems will take effect.
For a server with VERITAS VxVM V3.2 or above
❑ Issue the following command:
vxddladm addjbod vid=DGC pagecode 0x83 offset=8 length=16
You need to issue this command just once and it will take effect on the next
reboot.
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and New Storage System
5-13
Solaris Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and Existing Storage
System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be completed
before the service provider arrives.
The Without Access Logix column does not apply to CX300, CX500, and
CX700 storage systems because they ship from the factory with the Access
Logix enabler installed.
Task
1
2
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install HBAs and
driver
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
Install HBAs.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
Reference Document
❑ Install HBAs.
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 5-4).
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
❑ Install HBA driver.
❑ Install HBA driver.
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters,
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters,
For an Emulex HBA driver, be
sure to set the following
parameter:
no-device-delay=0
Solaris host
except for the persistent bindings, connectivity guide
to the values required for
For Emulex or QLogic
CLARiiON and Power Path.
HBAs - HBA
You will set the persistent
documentation (see
bindings after the storage system URL on page 5-4)
is installed and the switches are
For JNI HBAs - Solaris
zoned.
utilities administrator
For an Emulex HBA driver, be
guide
sure to set the following
parameter:
no-device-delay=0
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
except for the persistent bindings,
to the values required for
CLARiiON and PowerPath.
You will set the persistent
bindings after the storage system
is installed and the switches are
zoned.
5-14
Without Access Logix
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
3
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Install PowerPath.
❑ If you have a PowerPath license
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install PowerPath.
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath
for UNIX installation
and administrator’s
guide
❑ If you have a PowerPath license
key, register it.
❑ Reboot the server to complete
key, register it
❑ Reboot the server to complete
the installation of PowerPath.
4
5
6
the installation of PowerPath.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
http://powerlink.emc.com
Server
Install Host
Agent or Server
Utility
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent ❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent CX-Series Server
Server
Install admsnap
❑ If the server will be a SnapView
Storage System
Update software
❑ If currently installed
or Navisphere Server Utility and
the Navisphere CLI.
or Navisphere Server Utility and
the Navisphere CLI.
Software for Solaris
Installation Guide
N/A
production or secondary host,
install the admsnap utility.
❑ If currently installed
storage-system software is not at
the required minimum revision,
update it.
Navisphere Manager
storage-system software is not at administrator’s guide
the required minimum revision,
and online help
update it.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and Existing Storage System
5-15
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
7
5-16
With Access Logix
Server
Cable to
switches or
storage system
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Cable the HBA ports to the switch ❑ Cable the HBA ports to the switch Storage-system setup
connected to the storage system
or to SP ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
connected to the storage system
or to SP ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
the HBA connection to the switch
by checking the LED(s) for the
switch port connected to the HBA
port.
the HBA connection to the switch
by checking the LED(s) for the
switch port connected to the HBA
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA is logged in to the switch
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA is logged in to the switch
port.
For a 2-Gigabit switch - One of
the following:
For a 2-Gigabit switch - One of
the following:
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
guide.
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
8
Switches
Zone
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
For a SAN
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
Zone the switches to provide a path
from each HBA port (host initiator) to
the appropriate SPs
Switch management
documentation
path from each HBA port (host
initiator) to the appropriate SPs
❑ If SAN Copy, MirrorView, or
MirrorView/A is installed, create
any required zones.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
9
Storage System
Register HBAs
❑ On the server, restart the
Navisphere Host Agent or
Navisphere Server Utility.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
Manager’s Connectivity Status
dialog box to verify that each HBA
is registered with the storage
system.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
For an FC4500 storage system go to
step 11.
CX-Series Server
Software for Solaris
Installation Guide
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
For an FC4500 storage system,
go to step 11.
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and Existing Storage System
5-17
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
10 CX300, CX400,
CX500, CX600,
CX700, or
FC4700-Series
Storage System
Set Properties
for PowerPath
❑ Use Navisphere Manager’s
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI Navisphere Manager
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s HBA ports (initiators):
Initiator Type to CLARiiON Open
Failover mode to 1
Array commpath to Enabled
Reference Document
command to determine the
default storage-system type:
administrator’s guide
and online help or
Navisphere CLI
navicli -h hostname systemtype
reference
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set it
to 3:
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
❑ If the server is in a Sun Cluster,
use the following Navisphere CLI
command to set the
unitserialnumber storage-system
property to lun:
navicli -h hostname
unitserialnumber lun
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
Go to step 12.
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
storage-system properties:
navicli -h hostname
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
navicli -h hostname
unitserialnumber lun (only for
server in a Sun Cluster)
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
Go to step 12.
5-18
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
reference
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
11 FC4500 Storage
System
❑ Connect a computer to the serial ❑ Connect a computer to the serial Storage-system setup
port on the storage system.
Without Access Logix
port on the storage system
Reference Document
guide
❑ From the computer connected to ❑ From the computer connected to Navisphere CLI
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s HBA ports (initiators):
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -type 3
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -arraycommpath 1
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -unitserialnumber
lun (only for server in a Sun
Cluster; it must left at the default
setting for all other cases)
where
device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
servername is the name of the
server with the HBAs.
the storage system’s serial port, reference
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to determine the
default storage-system type:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
command to set it to 3:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype -config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and Existing Storage System
5-19
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
the storage system’s serial port, reference
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
navicli -np -d device
unitserialnumber lun (only for
server in a Sun Cluster; it must
left at the default setting for all
other cases)
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
❑ Add persistent bindings to the
HBA driver configuration file.
❑ Add persistent bindings to the
HBA driver configuration file.
❑ Edit the /kernel/drv/sd.conf file
❑ Edit the /kernel/drv/sd.conf file
to add any additional LUNs you
will bind and their targets.
to add any additional LUNs you
will bind and their targets.
❑ Reboot the server using the
reboot - - -r command so the
HBA can see the targets (SPs).
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that each
HBA sees only the targets (SPs)
to which it is zoned.
5-20
Reference Document
❑ From the computer connected to Navisphere CLI
11 FC4500 Storage
System (cont.)
12 Server
Make target SPs
available
Without Access Logix
❑ Reboot the server using the
reboot - - -r command so the
HBA can see the targets (SPs).
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that each
HBA sees only the targets (SPs)
to which it is zoned.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Solaris utilities kit
administrator’s guide
Solaris driver.conf man
page
Solaris documentation
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
12 Server
Make target SPs
available (cont.)
❑ Checkpoint - Use the inquiry
❑ Checkpoint - Use the inquiry
Solaris documentation
13 Storage System
Configure
option of the format command to
verify the paths to the storage
system. Alternate paths will have
a device with an ID of drive type
unknown.
option of the format command to
verify the paths to the storage
system. Alternate paths will have
a device with an ID of drive type
unknown.
Note The format command will
display n+1 device entries for
each LUN, where n is the number
of paths to the LUN. One of these
entries is a PowerPath device and
the other n entries are native
devices.
Note The format command will
display n+1 device entries for
each LUN, where n is the number
of paths to the LUN. One of these
entries is a PowerPath device and
the other n entries are native
devices.
❑ If the server will use an existing
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage Group, use Navisphere
Manager to connect the server to
the Storage Group.
❑ If the server will use a new
Storage Group, use Navisphere
Manager to create RAID Groups,
bind LUNs, create the Storage
Group, and assign LUNs to the
Storage Group.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
connect the server to the Storage
Group.
❑ Reboot the server using the
❑ Reboot the server using the
reboot - - -r command so that
Solaris recognizes the LUNs.
reboot - - -r command so that
Solaris recognizes the LUNs.
Now the LUNs in the Storage
Group look like any other disks in
the server.
Now the LUNs look like any other
disks in the server.
❑ Checkpoint - Use the format
❑ Checkpoint - Use the format
command to verify that Solaris
recognizes the LUNs.
command to verify that Solaris
recognizes the LUNs.
Solaris documentation
If Solaris does not recognize any
LUNs, verify the connection to the
Storage Group.
❑ For an FC4500, disconnect the
computer from the serial port on
the storage system.
❑ For an FC4500, disconnect the
computer from the serial port on
the storage system.
Storage-system setup
guide
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and Existing Storage System
5-21
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
14 Server
Make LUNs
available to
Solaris
❑ Prepare LUNs to receive data by ❑ Prepare the LUNs to receive data Solaris host
• Specifying Solaris mount point
names for them
• Labeling and partitioning them
• Mounting file systems on them
• Mounting them to the mount
points
15 Server
Configure
PowerPath for
missing devices
5-22
❑ Use the following PowerPath
Without Access Logix
by
• Specifying Solaris mount point
names for them
Reference Document
connectivity guide or
Solaris documentation
• Labeling and partitioning them
• Mounting file systems on them
• Mounting them to the mount
points
❑ Use the following PowerPath
commands to configure
PowerPath for any missing logical
devices so all paths to the LUNs
are visible:
PowerPath product
commands to configure
guide
PowerPath for any missing logical
devices so all paths to the LUNs
are visible:
powercf -i or powercf -q
powercf -i or powercf -q
powermt config
powermt config
❑ Checkpoint - Use the following
❑ Checkpoint - Use the following
PowerPath command to verify
that PowerPath sees all paths to
the LUNs:
PowerPath command to verify
that PowerPath sees all paths to
the LUNs:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath cannot see all the
paths, verify that
If PowerPath cannot see all the
paths, verify that
• You registered your PowerPath
license key.
• You registered your PowerPath
license key.
• The storage-system properties
are set as defined in step 10.
• The storage-system properties
are set as defined in step 10.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
16 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
If you have a PowerPath license key If you have a PowerPath license key PowerPath product
guide
Note If your PowerPath license key is Note If your PowerPath license key is
not registered, the load balancing
not registered, the load balancing
policy is restricted to basic failover.
policy is restricted to basic failover.
❑ Stop all applications accessing
❑ Stop all applications accessing
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
❑ View the LUNs available to the
❑ View the LUNs available to the
server using the following
PowerPath command:
server using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to
❑ Choose one available LUN to
receive I/O for the test.
receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen
❑ View the paths to the chosen
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt
❑ View the output of the powermt
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
Reference Document
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
PowerPath Checklist — New Solaris Server and Existing Storage System
5-23
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
16 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key (cont.)
❑ If you did not follow the above
❑ If you did not follow the above
17 Server
VERITAS VxVM
Reference Document
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
PowerPath product
steps exactly and caused any
guide
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
powermt restore
powermt restore
For a server with VERITAS VxVM
V3.1.1 or below
For a server with VERITAS VxVM
V3.1.1 or below
the /etc/rcS.d/S24powerstartup
file to add the following two lines
to the bottom of the file after the
last fi character:
VERITAS VxVM
documentation and
EMC manual on
Before you reboot the server, edit
installing and
the /etc/rcS.d/S24powerstartup
configuring EMP power
file to add the following two lines
devices with Solaris
to the bottom of the file after the
applications
last fi character:
/etc/powermt set
volume_open_policy=firstpath
/etc/powermt set
volume_open_policy=firstpath
echo "PowerPath:powermt set
volume_open_policy=firstpath"
echo "PowerPath:powermt set
volume_open_policy=firstpath"
On the next reboot, the first path
policy used by CLARiiON storage
systems will take effect.
On the next reboot, the first path
policy used by CLARiiON storage
systems will take effect.
❑ Before you reboot the server, edit ❑
For a server with VERITAS VxVM
V3.2 or above
For a server with VERITAS VxVM
V3.2 or above
❑ Issue the following command:
❑ Issue the following command:
vxddladm addjbod vid=DGC
pagecode 0x83 offset=8
length=16
vxddladm addjbod vid=DGC
pagecode 0x83 offset=8
length=16
You need to issue this command
just once and it will take effect on
the next reboot.
You need to issue this command
just once and it will take effect on
the next reboot.
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
5-24
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Solaris Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and New Storage
System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be performed
before the service provider arrives, except for the removal of ATF or
CDE, which you can have done by EMC Professional Services.
!
CAUTION
EMC no longer supports ATF or CDE. Before you transition your
server from ATF or CDE to PowerPath, you must
◆
Back up your server configurations.
◆
Back up data on all storage systems connected to the server.
◆
Remove ATF or CDE, which EMC recommends that EMC
Professional Services do, especially if your server configuration
is complex. If you want to remove it yourself, you must use the
procedure in the Removing ATF or CDE Software Before
Installing Other Failover Software document (P/N 069001173),
which is on the Powerlink website with this roadmap.
Simply removing ATF or CDE using the uninstall procedure in
the Solaris ATF administrator’s guide or the Solaris utilities
administrator’s guide may not return the server to it original
state, and may result in lost data.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and New Storage System
5-25
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
1
2
3
With Access Logix
Reference Document
Server
Install additional
HBAs
❑ If you need additional HBAs to provide more paths to the storage system, HBA documentation
Server
Remove ATF or
CDE
❑ If ATF or CDE is installed, then before continuing either remove it yourself Removing ATF or
Server
Update Software
❑ If the following software is currently installed and not at the required
install these HBAs.
CAUTION Do not connect cables to the HBAs until you are told to do so
later in this procedure.
(see caution before this checklist) or arrange to have EMC Professional
Services remove it.
minimum revision (page 5-3), update it:
(see URL on
page 5-4)
CDE
HBA documentation
(see URL on
page 5-4)
• HBA driver (save the persistent bindings as you will need to add them to
the new driver.)
CX-Series Server
Software for Solaris
• Navisphere Host Agent
Installation Guide
• admsnap
4
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
❑ Make sure the HBA driver parameters, except for the persistent bindings,
are set to the values required for CLARiiON and PowerPath.
Solaris host
connectivity guide
You will set the persistent bindings after the storage system is installed and HBA documentation
the switches are zoned.
(see URL on
page 5-4)
For an Emulex HBA driver, be sure to set the following parameter:
no-device-delay=0
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O delays.
5
Server
Install PowerPath
❑ Install PowerPath.
❑ If you have a PowerPath license key, register it.
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath
for UNIX installation
and administrator’s
guide
❑ Reboot the server to complete the installation of PowerPath.
Note The format command will display n+1 device entries for each LUN,
where n is the number of paths to the LUN. One of these entries is a
PowerPath device and the other n entries are native devices.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches from the Software downloads page on the
EMC Powerlink website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
6
5-26
Storage System
Install
❑ Install the storage system in the cabinet, if not already installed.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Rails and cabinet
documentation
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
7
With Access Logix
Storage System
❑ Install the Navisphere Initialization Utility on a host on the same subnet as Storage-system setup
the storage-system management ports.
guide
Initialize and install
software enablers
❑ Use the Navisphere Initialization Utility to initialize the storage system.
❑ If you have SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and/or MirrorView/A
software, install their enablers.
8
Reference Document
Storage System
Cable to switch or
server and LAN
❑ Connect the storage system to the switch or HBA ports.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage-system setup
guide
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the storage-system connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each SP
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the SP is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gigabit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
❑ Cable each SP to the LAN connected to the hosts from which you will
manage the storage system.
9
Storage System
Set up security
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to define a global administrator and domain (if
10 Set Properties for ❑
PowerPath
not already defined) and any additional users.
Use the following the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the
following default storage-system properties:
Storage-system setup
guide
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
Navisphere CLI
reference
navicli -h hostname systemtype -config 3
navicli -h hostname failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
navicli -h hostname unitserialnumber lun (only for server in a Sun
Cluster; it must left at the default setting for all other cases)
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the storage
system.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and New Storage System
5-27
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
11 Server
❑
Cable additional
HBAs to switches
or storage system ❑
Cable any additional HBA ports to the switch connected to the storage
system or to SP ports.
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide.
Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the HBA connections to the switch by
checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each additional HBA
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA port is
logged in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gigabit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
12 Switches
Zone additional
HBAs
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each additional HBA port (host
Switch management
documentation
initiator) to the SPs.
❑ If SAN Copy, MirrorView, or MIrrorView/A is installed, create any required
zones.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify the switch
connections to the storage system.
13 Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Add persistent bindings for the new SPs and any new HBAs to the HBA
driver configuration file.
Note Removing ATF does not remove or change the persistent bindings.
❑ Edit the /kernel/drv/sd.conf file to add LUNs and their targets.
Solaris driver.conf
man page
❑ Reboot the server using the reboot - - -r command so the HBA can see
Solaris documentation
the targets (SPs).
❑ Checkpoint - Verify that each HBA sees only the targets (SPs) to which it
is zoned.
❑ Checkpoint - Use the inquiry option of the format command to verify that
each path to the storage system has one arraycommpath device with an ID
of drive type unknown.
The output of this command should be Vendor DGC, Product LUNZ.
5-28
Solaris utilities kit
administrator’s guide
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
13 Server
Make target SPs
available (cont.)
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere Manager’s Connectivity Status dialog box Navisphere Manager
to verify that each HBA is registered with the storage system.
administrator’s guide
and online help
14 Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group
❑ Reboot the server using the reboot - - -r command so that Solaris
Solaris documentation
recognizes the LUNs.
Now the LUNs in the Storage Group look like any other disks in the server.
❑ Checkpoint - Use the format command to verify that Solaris recognizes
Solaris documentation
the LUNs.
If Solaris does not recognize any LUNs, verify the server’s connection to
the Storage Group.
15 Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ If you will monitor storage-system events, apply the desired event monitor Navisphere Manager
16 Server
Make LUNs
available to
Solaris
❑ Prepare the LUNs to receive data by
templates to the storage system.
• Specifying Solaris mount point names for them
administrator’s guide
and online help
Solaris host
connectivity guide or
Solaris documentation
• Labeling and partitioning them
• Mounting file systems on them
• Mounting them to the mount points
17 Server
Configure
PowerPath for
missing devices
❑ Use the following PowerPath commands to configure PowerPath for any
missing logical devices so all paths to LUNs are visible:
PowerPath product
guide
powercf -i or powercf -q
powermt config
❑ Checkpoint - Use the following PowerPath command to verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to the LUNs:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
If PowerPath cannot see all the paths, verify that
• You registered your PowerPath license key.
• The storage-system properties are set as defined in step 10.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and New Storage System
5-29
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
18 Server
If you have a PowerPath license key
PowerPath product
guide
Test PowerPath
Note If your PowerPath license key is not registered, the load balancing policy is
with a license key restricted to basic failover.
❑ View the LUNs available to the server using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to LUN by viewing the output of the powermt
display dev=x every=2 command, and disconnect the cable to that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and
-
verify that
• The state of the uncabled path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining path(s) to the LUN, indicating that the
path failover was successful, and PowerPath is working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above steps exactly and caused any LUNs to
trespass, restore the LUNs to their original SP with the following
PowerPath command:
PowerPath product
guide
powermt restore
19 Server
Applications
online
5-30
❑ Bring any applications that you shut down (such as clustering or
databases) back online, and configure for PowerPath if required.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
PowerPath for Unix
installation and
administrator’s guide
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
20 Server
VERITAS VxVM
For a server with VERITAS VxVM V3.1.1 or below
VERITAS VxVM
documentation and
EMC manual on
installing and
configuring EMP
power devices with
Solaris applications
❑ Before you reboot the server, edit the /etc/rcS.d/S24powerstartup file to
add the following two lines to the bottom of the file after the last fi
character:
/etc/powermt set volume_open_policy=firstpath
echo "PowerPath:powermt set volume_open_policy=firstpath"
On the next reboot, the first path policy used by CLARiiON storage
systems will take effect.
For a server with VERITAS VxVM V3.2 or above
❑ Issue the following command:
vxddladm addjbod vid=DGC pagecode 0x83 offset=8 length=16
You need to issue this command just once and it will take effect on the next
reboot.
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and New Storage System
5-31
Solaris Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and Existing
Storage System
This checklist assumes that the existing Solaris server and existing
storage system are already connected in a SAN or direct attach
configuration. Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be
performed before the service provider arrives, except for the removal
of ATF or CDE, which you can have done by EMC Professional
Services.
!
CAUTION
EMC no longer supports ATF or CDE. Before you transition your
server from ATF or CDE to PowerPath, you must
◆
Back up your server configurations.
◆
Back up data on all storage systems connected to the server.
◆
Remove ATF or CDE, which EMC recommends that EMC
Professional Services do, especially if your server configuration
is complex. If you want to remove it yourself, you must use the
procedure in the Removing ATF or CDE Software Before
Installing Other Failover Software document (P/N 069001173),
which is on the Powerlink website with this roadmap.
Simply removing ATF or CDE using the uninstall procedure in
the Solaris ATF administrator’s guide or the Solaris utilities
administrator’s guide may not return the server to it original
state, and may result in lost data.
If you are transitioning a SunCluster or VERITAS Cluster Server
(VCS) configuration from ATF or CDE to PowerPath, perform the
procedure in the checklist on each node in succession. While you
perform the procedure on one node, you can leave the cluster services
active on the other node, provided failure in a path to the storage
system does not occur.
5-32
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Solaris Installation Checklists
The Without Access Logix column does not apply to CX300, CX500, and
CX700 storage systems because they ship from the factory with the Access
Logix enabler installed.
Task
1
2
3
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install additional
HBAs
Server
Remove ATF or
CDE
If you need additional HBAs to
HBA documentation
provide more paths to the storage (see URL on page 5-4)
system, install these HBAs.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
before continuing either remove it
yourself (see caution before this
checklist) or arrange to have EMC
Professional Services remove it.
If the following software is
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision
(page 5-3), update it
❑ If ATF or CDE is installed, then
Server
Set HBA driver
parameters
Removing ATF or CDE
before continuing either remove it
yourself (see caution before this
checklist) or arrange to have EMC
Professional Services remove it.
❑ If the following software is
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision
(page 5-3), update it:
For Emulex or QLogic
driver- HBA
documentation (see
URL on page 5-4)
• HBA driver (save the persistent
bindings as you will need to
add them to the new driver.)
• HBA driver (save the persistent For JNI driver- Solaris
bindings as you will need to
utilities administrator
add them to the new driver.
guide
• Navisphere Host Agent
• Navisphere Host Agent
• admsnap
4
Reference Document
If you need additional HBAs to
❑
provide more paths to the storage
system, install these HBAs.
❑ If ATF or CDE is installed, then
Server
❑
Update Software
Without Access Logix
❑ Make sure the HBA driver
CX-Series Server
Software for Solaris
Installation Guide
❑ Make sure the HBA driver
For an Emulex HBA driver, be
sure to set the following
parameter:
no-device-delay=0
Solaris host connectivity
parameters, except for the
guide
persistent bindings, are set to the
For Emulex or QLogic
values required for CLARiiON
HBAs - HBA
and PowerPath.
documentation (see
For an Emulex HBA driver, be
URL on page 5-4)
sure to set the following
For JNI HBAs - Solaris
parameter:
utilities administrator
no-device-delay=0
guide
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
parameters, except for the
persistent bindings, are set to the
values required for CLARiiON
and PowerPath.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and Existing Storage System
5-33
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
5
With Access Logix
Storage System ❑
Update software
5-34
Reference Document
If currently installed
❑
storage-system software is not at
the required minimum revision,
update it.
If currently installed
Navisphere Manager
storage-system software is not at administrator’s guide
the required minimum revision,
and online help
update it.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access to
data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
step 7.
6
Without Access Logix
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
step 7.
CX300, CX400,
For new HBAs
For any HBAs
Navisphere CLI
CX500, CX600,
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI ❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI reference
CX700,or
command to determine the
command to determine the
FC4700-Series
default storage-system type:
default storage-system type:
Storage System
navicli -h hostname systemtype
navicli -h hostname systemtype
Set properties for
PowerPath
where hostname is the IP
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
SP in the storage system.
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set it
to 3:
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set it
to 3:
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
6
With Access Logix
CX300, CX400,
❑
CX500, CX600,
CX700,or
FC4700-Series
Storage System
Set properties for
PowerPath (cont.)
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Use the following Navisphere CLI ❑
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
Use the following Navisphere CLI Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
reference
default storage-system
properties:
navicli -h hostname
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
navicli -h hostname
unitserialnumber lun (only for
server in a Sun Cluster; it must
left at the default setting for all
other cases)
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
navicli -h hostname
unitserialnumber lun (only for
server in a Sun Cluster; it must
left at the default setting for all
other cases)
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
Go to step 8.
For existing HBAs
An existing HBA is one that is
registered with the storage system.
Go to step 8.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager’s
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA ports
(initiators):
Initiator Type to CLARiiON Open
Failover mode to 1
Array commpath to Enabled
Unit Serial Number to LUN
Go to step 8.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and Existing Storage System
5-35
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
7
With Access Logix
FC4500 Storage ❑ Connect a computer to the serial ❑ Connect a computer to the serial
System
port on the storage system.
port on the storage system.
Set properties for
For new HBAs
For any HBAs
PowerPath
❑ From the computer connected to ❑ From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
use the following Navisphere CLI
command to determine the
command to determine the
default storage-system type:
default storage-system type:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype
navicli -np -d device
systemtype
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set it
to 3:
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set it
to 3:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype -config 3
navicli -np -d device
systemtype -config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
5-36
Without Access Logix
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same time.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide
Navisphere CLI
reference
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
7
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
FC4500 Storage For new HBAs (cont.)
For new HBAs (cont.)
Navisphere CLI
System
❑ From the computer connected to ❑ From the computer connected to reference
Set properties for
the storage system’s serial port,
the storage system’s serial port,
PowerPath (cont.)
use the following Navisphere CLI
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
commands to set the following
default storage-system
default storage-system
properties:
properties:
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
navicli -np -d device
unitserialnumber lun (only for
server in a Sun Cluster; it must
left at the default setting for all
other cases)
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
navicli -np -d device
unitserialnumber lun (only for
server in a Sun Cluster; it must
left at the default setting for all
other cases)
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and Existing Storage System
5-37
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
7
With Access Logix
FC4500 Storage
System
Set properties for
PowerPath (cont.)
Without Access Logix
For existing HBAs
An existing HBA is one that is
registered with the storage system.
❑ From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA existing
ports (initiators):
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -type 3
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -arraycommpath 1
navicli -np -d device
unitserialnumber lun (only for
server in a Sun Cluster; it must
left at the default setting for all
other cases)
where
device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
servername is the name of the
server with the HBAs.
5-38
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Reference Document
Navisphere CLI
reference
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
8
Server
Install
PowerPath
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install PowerPath.
❑ Install PowerPath.
❑ If you have a PowerPath license
❑ If you have a PowerPath license
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath for
UNIX installation and
administrator’s guide
key, register it.
❑ Reboot the server to complete
key, register it
❑ Reboot the server to complete
the installation of PowerPath.
the installation of PowerPath.
Note The format command will
display n+1 device entries for
each LUN, where n is the number
of paths to the LUN. One of these
entries is a PowerPath device and
the other n entries are native
devices.
Note The format command will
PowerPath product
display n+1 device entries for
guide
each LUN, where n is the number
of paths to the LUN. One of these
entries is a PowerPath device and
the other n entries are native
devices.
❑ Checkpoint - Use the following
❑ Checkpoint - Use the following
PowerPath command to verify
that PowerPath sees the paths to
the LUNs:
PowerPath command to verify
that PowerPath sees the paths to
the LUNs:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection
to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are set as defined in
step 6.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are set as defined in
step 6.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and Existing Storage System
5-39
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
9
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Cable additional
HBAs to
switches or
storage system ❑
Reference Document
Cable any additional HBA ports to ❑
the switch connected to the
storage system or to SP ports.
Cable any additional HBA ports to Storage-system setup
the switch connected to the
guide.
storage system or to SP ports.
Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
❑
the HBA connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for
the switch port connected to each
additional HBA port.
Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
the HBA connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for
the switch port connected to each
additional HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which indicates
that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged
in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
For a SAN
10 Switches
Zone for
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
additional HBAs
path from each additional HBA
port (host initiator) to the
appropriate SPs.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
5-40
Without Access Logix
For a SAN
❑ Zone the switches to provide a
path from each additional HBA
port (host initiator) to the
appropriate SPs.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Switch management
documentation
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
11 Server
❑
Make target SPs
available
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
If you updated the driver or added ❑
additional HBAs, add persistent
bindings to the HBA driver
configuration file.
If you updated the driver or added Solaris utilities kit
additional HBAs, add persistent administrator’s guide
bindings to the HBA driver
configuration file.
Note Removing ATF does not
remove or change the persistent
bindings.
Note Removing ATF does not
remove or change the persistent
bindings.
❑ Edit the /kernel/drv/sd.conf file
❑ Edit the /kernel/drv/sd.conf file
to add LUNs for the new targets.
to add LUNs with new targets.
❑ If you added persistent bindings,
❑ If you added persistent bindings,
reboot the server using the
reboot - - -r command so the
HBAs can see the targets (SPs).
reboot the server using the
reboot - - -r command so the
HBAs can see the targets (SPs).
❑ Checkpoint - Use the inquiry
Solaris documentation
❑ Checkpoint - Use the inquiry
option of the format command to
verify the paths to the storage
system. Alternate paths will have
a device with an ID of drive type
unknown.
12 Server
❑
Make paths to
additional HBAs
available
Solaris driver.conf man
page
Use Navisphere Manager to
N/A
disconnect and then reconnect
the server and its Storage Group.
option of the format command to
verify the paths to the storage
system. Alternate paths will have
a device with an ID of drive type
unknown.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Reboot the server using the
reboot - - -r command so the
HBAs can see the LUNs in the
Storage Group.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and Existing Storage System
5-41
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
13 Server
❑
Configure
PowerPath for
missing devices
Without Access Logix
Use the following Power Path
❑
commands to configure
PowerPath for any missing logical
devices so all paths to the LUNs
are visible:
Use the following PowerPath
PowerPath product
commands to configure
guide
PowerPath for any missing logical
devices so all paths to the LUNs
are visible:
powercf -i or powercf -q
powercf -i or powercf -q
powermt config
powermt config
❑ Checkpoint - Use the following
❑ Checkpoint - Use the following
PowerPath command to verify
that PowerPath sees all paths to
the LUNs:
PowerPath command to verify
that PowerPath sees all paths to
the LUNs:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath cannot see all the
paths, verify that
If PowerPath cannot see all the
paths, verify that
• You registered your PowerPath
license key.
• You registered your PowerPath
license key.
• The storage-system properties
are set as defined in steps 6 or
7.
• The storage-system properties
are set as defined in step 6 or
7.
For an FC4500 storage system
For an FC4500 storage system
❑ Disconnect the computer from the ❑ Disconnect the computer from the
serial port on the storage system.
14 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
5-42
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide
serial port on the storage system.
If you have a PowerPath license key If you have a PowerPath license key PowerPath product
guide
Note If your PowerPath license key is Note If your PowerPath license key is
not registered, the load balancing
not registered, the load balancing
policy is restricted to basic failover.
policy is restricted to basic failover.
❑ Stop all applications accessing
❑ Stop all applications accessing
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
the storage system and disable
user logins to the server.
❑ View the LUNs available to the
❑ View the LUNs available to the
server using the following
PowerPath command:
server using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to
❑ Choose one available LUN to
receive I/O for the test.
receive I/O for the test.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
14 Server
❑ View the paths to the chosen
❑ View the paths to the chosen
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
PowerPath product
guide
powermt display dev=x every=2
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
Test PowerPath
with a license
key (cont.)
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt
❑ View the output of the powermt
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
15 Server
Applications
online
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
powermt restore
powermt restore
❑ Bring any applications that you
shut down (such as clustering or
databases) back online, and
configure for PowerPath if
required.
❑ Bring any applications that you
shut down (such as clustering or
databases) back online, and
configure for PowerPath if
required.
PowerPath for Unix
installation and
administrator’s guide
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Solaris Server and Existing Storage System
5-43
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
16 Server
VERITAS VxVM
For a server with VERITAS VxVM
V3.1.1 or below
For a server with VERITAS VxVM
V3.1.1 or below
the /etc/rcS.d/S24powerstartup
file to add the following two lines
to the bottom of the file after the
last fi character:
VERITAS VxVM
documentation and
EMC manual on
Before you reboot the server, edit
installing and
the /etc/rcS.d/S24powerstartup
configuring EMP power
file to add the following two lines
devices with Solaris
to the bottom of the file after the
applications
last fi character:
/etc/powermt set
volume_open_policy=firstpath
/etc/powermt set
volume_open_policy=firstpath
echo "PowerPath:powermt set
volume_open_policy=firstpath"
echo "PowerPath:powermt set
volume_open_policy=firstpath"
On the next reboot, the first path
policy used by CLARiiON storage
systems will take effect.
On the next reboot, the first path
policy used by CLARiiON storage
systems will take effect.
❑ Before you reboot the server, edit ❑
5-44
Reference Document
For a server with VERITAS VxVM
V3.2 or above
For a server with VERITAS VxVM
V3.2 or above
❑ Issue the following command:
❑ Issue the following command:
vxddladm addjbod vid=DGC
pagecode 0x83 offset=8
length=16
vxddladm addjbod vid=DGC
pagecode 0x83 offset=8
length=16
You need to issue this command
just once and it will take effect on
the next reboot.
You need to issue this command
just once and it will take effect on
the next reboot.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Solaris Installation Checklists
DMP Configurations for Solaris
Read this section if you are installing a Solaris VERITAS DMP
configuration with a new server and a new storage system. A new
server and a new storage system are defined as follows:
new server - A server running Solaris and not connected to any
storage system.
new storage system - A CX300, CX500, or CX700 storage system that
has factory default settings and has never been connected to a server.
Topics relating to the checklist for Solaris DMP configurations are
◆
◆
◆
◆
Required Host
Software Revisions
Required Host Software Revisions................................................ 5-45
Prerequisites ..................................................................................... 5-45
Documentation................................................................................. 5-46
DMP Checklist - New Solaris Server and New Storage System5-48
◆
Solaris operating system revision and patches listed in the EMC
Support Matrix on the Powerlink website
(http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
HBA driver revision listed in the EMC Support Matrix on the
Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
VxVM 3.2 update 2 or higher
◆
You have installed the storage systems and, for FC4700 storage
systems, initialized them (see storage-system initialization guide).
◆
You have set up storage-system security (see Security
administrator’s guide and Navisphere Manager online help).
◆
You have installed any switches and connected the
storage-system SPs to switch ports (see switch documentation)
◆
You have installed Navisphere Manager.
Prerequisites
DMP Configurations for Solaris
5-45
Solaris Installation Checklists
◆
You have a host that is
• Running an operating system that can support the Navisphere
Manager 6.X browser-based client. For an up-to-date list of
such operating systems, refer to the Navisphere Manager 6.X
release notes on http://powerlink.emc.com.
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system server
that you will connect to the SPs in the storage system.
◆
You must have planned your LUNs and RAID Groups, and
Storage Groups if you have Access Logix. Be sure to consider
requirements for SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and
MirrorView/A if you have this software. The EMC CLARiiON
CX300, CX500, CX500i, and CX700 Storage Systems Configuration
Planning Guide (P/N 300-001-273) will help you with this
planning.
Documentation
This checklist refers to some or all of the documents listed below. We
recommend that you load these documents on your service laptop
before starting the installation.
◆
Documentation that ships with the HBA and HBA driver.
This documentation is also available from the following websites:
For Emulex HBAs and drivers:
http://www.emulex.com/ts/docoem/framemc.htm
For QLogic HBAs and drivers:
http://www.qlogic.com/support/drivers_software.asp
and select EMC in the OEM-approved Drivers/Firmware list at the
bottom of the page.
◆
Documentation that ships with
• Switches and switch management software
• Sun Solaris® operating system
• VERITAS Volume Manager
5-46
◆
Storage-System Host Utilities for Solaris Administrator’s Guide
(P/N 069001140)
◆
EMC CX-Series Server Software for Solaris Installation Guide
(P/N 300-002-039)
◆
EMC Rails and Enclosures Installation Guide for 19-Inch NEMA
Cabinets (P/N 014003082)
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Solaris Installation Checklists
◆
EMC CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE) Setup Guide
(P/N 300-001-276, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-276, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup
Guide (P/N 300-001-274, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-274), rev A01) and EMC CLARiiON
CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization Guide
(P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk-Array Enclosure (DAE2) Setup and Cabling
Guide (P/N 014003104)
◆
EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001125)
◆
EMC Navisphere Security Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001124)
◆
EMC Host Connectivity Guide for Sun Solaris (P/N 300-000-607)
DMP Configurations for Solaris
5-47
Solaris Installation Checklists
DMP Checklist - New Solaris Server and New Storage System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be completed
before the service provider arrives.
Task
1
Server
Install HBAs,
drivers, cables
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install the Fibre Channel HBAs, and, if needed, install the optical GBIC
For Emulex or Qlogic
HBAs - HBA
documentation (see URL
on page 5-4)
connector on the 1-Gbit PCI HBA.
For JNI HBAs - Solaris
utilities administrator
guide
❑ Install the HBA driver.
❑ Connect cables from the host HBA port to a switch port.
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to the settings required for CLARiiON,
2
Server
Edit the HBA
driver file
3
Server
❑
Add LUNs to the ❑
sd.conf file
4
Server
Install the Host
Agent or Server
Software
For Emulex or Qlogic
except for the persistent bindings, which you will set after you have zoned HBAs - HBA
the switches.
documentation (see URL
on page 5-4)
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O delays.
For JNI HBAs - Solaris
utilities administrator
guide
Add LUNs to the /kernel/drv/sd.conf file
Reboot the server using the reboot -- -r command.
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent or Navisphere Server Utility and the
Navisphere CLI.
HBA documentation
(see URL on page 5-46)
CX-Series Server
Software for Solaris
Installation Guide
❑ If not already done, connect the LAN to the server and perform any
needed LAN configuration.
5
Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties,
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide and
online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
6
5-48
Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
❑ Set user options, create templates, and set up your monitoring
configuration.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Event Monitor
administrator’s guide and
online help.
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
7
Storage System
Set
arraycommpath
mode
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI command to set the default
Navisphere CLI reference
storage-system arraycommpath property with the following command:
navicli -h sp arraycommpath 1
where sp is the IP address or network name of the SP in the storage
system.
8
❑
Switch
Connect servers
and SPs
9
Switch
Zone switches
Verify that the servers and SPs are connected to the switch
For a SAN
Documentation that ships
with the switches
Documentation that ships
with the switches
❑ Zone switches.
This provides a path from the host initiator to the SP.
You will need to know the WWPN of the host initiators - available in the
switch’s name server table.
❑ Reboot the server using the reboot -- -r command to load the drivers and
perform a login of the host initiators and SPs to the fabric ports on the
switch.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify that the HBAs
and storage systems are logged in to the switch as fabric ports, and to
verify that each HBA sees only the targets (SPs) to which it is zoned.
10
Server
Add persistent
bindings
❑ Add persistent bindings to the HBA driver configuration file.
11
Storage System
Verify host
initiators are
registered
❑ Before you connect the server to a Storage Group, use the Connectivity Navisphere Manager
Storage System
Connect host
initiators to
Storage Groups
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect servers to Storage Groups
12
Solaris utilities
administrator guide
Status dialog in Navisphere Manager to verify that the host initiators are administrator’s guide and
registered.
online help
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide and
online help
❑ Reboot the server using the reboot -- -r command so that Solaris
recognizes the LUNs.
Now the LUNs in the Storage Group look like any other disks in the
server.
❑ Checkpoint - Use the format command to verify that the operating
system sees all the LUNs and label any new LUNs.
DMP Checklist - New Solaris Server and New Storage System
5-49
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
13
14
With Access Logix
Reference Document
Server
Install Volume
Manager and
DMP
❑ Use the pkgadd command to add Volume Manager and DMP to the
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
Server
Install the
CLARiiON DMP
driver
❑ Download the CLARiiON DMP driver to the server from Services on the
server.
❑ Install any recommended VERITAS updates.
VERITAS website.
❑ Use the pkgadd command to install the CLARiiON DMP driver on the
server.
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
Note Until rootdg is created (part of vxinstall command) on at least one
disk, DMP displays an error message looking for the config daemon.
15
Storage System ❑
Set the system
type and failover
mode
Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the default
storage-system type and failover mode properties with the following
commands:
navicli man page or
Navisphere CLI reference
navicli -h sp systemtype -config 3
navicli -h sp storagegroup -sethost -host solaris_host -failovermode
2
where
sp is the IP address or network name of the SP in the storage system.
solaris_host is the name of the Solaris server.
16
Server
Reboot
❑ Reboot the server using the reboot -- -r command
• to make LUNs available to Solaris
• to make LUNs accessible via both SPs
Important If you do not set the failover mode to 2, you will only see half of the
expected paths to the SPs.
17
❑
Server
Configure
Volume Manager
18
Server
Verify DMP
installation
Run vxinstall to configure Volume Manager and place at least one LUN VERITAS Volume
under VxVM control
Manager documentation
For VXVM 3.5 or higher
❑ Log into VERITAS Enterprise Administrator (VEA).
❑ Click the host name for the server.
❑ Click disks.
❑ Click a device that you know belongs to the CLARiiON storage system.
5-50
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
18
Server
Verify DMP
installation
(cont.)
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Click the paths tab for that device.
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
❑ Verify that the device has primary and secondary paths to it.
❑ Verify the state of the device (enabled or disabled).
For a VxVM version less than 3.5
❑ Log into Volume Manager Storage Administrator (VMSA)
❑ Double-click a disk icon.
❑ In the list of disks, double-click a disk you know belongs to the CLARiiON
storage system.
❑ Click the disks tab to verify there are the expected number of Primary
and Secondary paths.
❑ Verify that it displays the correct number of paths with
vxdisk list device
where device is the name of the disk you selected.
19
Server
Verify DMP
Operation
❑ Start I/O to the VERITAS Volume.
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
❑ Identify the CLARiiON devices under the Volume with
vxprint -v
❑ Choose one of the CLARiiON devices and determine all its paths with
vxdisk list device
or
vxdmpadm getsubpaths
dmpnodename=device
where device is the name of the CLARiiON device
DMP Checklist - New Solaris Server and New Storage System
5-51
Solaris Installation Checklists
Task
19
Server
Verify DMP
Operation
(cont.)
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Determine the controller through which I/O is going with
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
iostat -xn
❑ Determine the HBA and SP to which that controller corresponds.
❑ Disconnect the path to that SP.
❑ Verify that the path to the chosen CLARiiON device is disabled with
vxdisk list device
or
vxdmpadm getsubpaths
dmpnodename=device
where device is the name of the CLARiiON device
❑ Verify that I/0 is still running with
iostat -xn
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
!
CAUTION
If you want to install any new software or upgrade any existing
software on a storage system after DMP is installed and running,
you should use the Navisphere Manager Software Installation
Wizard. If this wizard is not supported for your storage system, be
sure to refer to the "Special NDU Procedure" in the "VERITAS
Volume Manager" section for CLARiiON of the Host Connectivity
Guide for Sun Solaris, which is available on the EMC Powerlink
website.
5-52
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
6
Invisible Body Tag
Tru64 UNIX Installation
Checklist
This chapter contains a checklist of the tasks required to install a new
CLARiiON storage system in a configuration with a new Tru64®
UNIX® server.
Topics are
◆
◆
◆
Tru64 UNIX Configurations .............................................................6-2
Checklist - New Tru64 UNIX Server and New Storage System
Without Boot Disk..............................................................................6-4
Checklist - New Tru64 UNIX Server and New Storage System
With Boot Disk....................................................................................6-6
Tru64 UNIX Installation Checklist
6-1
Tru64 UNIX Installation Checklist
Tru64 UNIX Configurations
Read this section if you are installing a Tru64 UNIX configuration
with a new server and a new storage system. A new server and
storage system are defined as follows:
New server - A server running Tru64 UNIX and not connected to any
storage system.
New storage system - A CX500 or CX700 storage system that has the
factory default settings and has never been connected to a server.
Prerequisites
◆
All switches must be installed.
◆
Storage systems must be set up, initialized (if required), and
connected to switches, and any optional storage-system software
(Access Logix, SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView,
MirrorView/A) must be installed.
◆
If you will use Navisphere Manager 6.X, you must have a host
that is
• Running an operating system that can support the Navisphere
Manager 6.X browser-based client. For an up-to-date list of
such operating systems, refer to the Navisphere Manager 6.X
release notes on http://powerlink.emc.com.
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system servers
and that will be connected to the SPs in CX500 or CX700
storage systems.
6-2
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Tru64 UNIX Installation Checklist
◆
Documentation
You must have planned your LUNs and RAID Groups, and
Storage Groups if you have Access Logix. Be sure to consider
requirements for SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and
MirrorView/A if you have this software. The EMC CLARiiON
CX300, CX500, CX500i, and CX700 Storage Systems Configuration
Planning Guide (P/N 300-001-273) will help you with this
planning.
This checklist refers to some or all of the documents listed below. We
recommend that you load these documents on your service laptop
before starting the installation.
◆
Documentation that ships with
• HBA and HBA driver
• Switches and switch management software
• Tru64® UNIX® operating system
◆
EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001125)
◆
EMC Navisphere Security Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001124)
◆
EMC Host Connectivity Guide for Compaq Tru64 UNIX
(P/N 300-000-616)
Tru64 UNIX Configurations
6-3
Tru64 UNIX Installation Checklist
Checklist - New Tru64 UNIX Server and New Storage System
Without Boot Disk
This checklist is for a new storage system that will not contain a Tru64
UNIX boot disk. If you want the new storage system to contain a boot
disk, use the procedure that starts on page 6-6.
Task
1
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install HBAs, drivers,
❑
and cables
Install the Fibre Channel HBAs.
Reference Document
HBA documentation
Connect a cable from each host HBA port to a switch
port.
❑ Create an entry in /etc/ddr.dbase to provide support for Host connectivity guide for Tru64 UNIX
CLARiiON LUNs.
❑ Install the HBA driver.
and Tru64 UNIX documentation
HBA documentation
❑ Checkpoint — Verify the server connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for the switch port
connected to each HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that
the HBA is logged in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which
indicates that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the
switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the
right LED is off, which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch port.
2
3
Switches
Zone
❑ Zone the switches to provide a path from each HBA
Storage System
Set Base UDID
❑ Set the Base UDID (UUID on screen) for the storage
Switch management documentation
(host initiator) to an SP.
system.
Host connectivity guide for Tru64 UNIX
and Tru64 UNIX documentation
If necessary, you can determine the available UDID
ranges for the server or cluster with the following
command:
wwidmgr -show wwid
6-4
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Tru64 UNIX Installation Checklist
Task
4
With Access Logix
Storage System
Set connection
properties
Reference Document
❑ Determine the port name and node name of each HBA Host connectivity guide for Tru64 UNIX
connected to the storage system.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to register the connection for Navisphere Manager administrator’s
each HBA with the following Initiator Record properties: guide and online help
Property
Initiator Type
ArrayCommPath
Failover Mode
Unit Serial Number
5
6
Value
Compaq/Tru64
Selected
0
Array
Storage System
Set up security
❑ For Navisphere 6.X, use Navisphere Manager to define Navisphere security administrator’s
Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system Host connectivity guide for Tru64 UNIX
a global administrator (if not already defined) and any
additional users.
properties.
guide and Navisphere Manager online
help
and Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind
LUNs, create Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to
Storage Groups.
❑ After the binding of all LUNs is completed, use
Navisphere Manager to connect the server to its
Storage Group.
7
Storage System
❑
Set up Event Monitor
Plan your monitoring configuration.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create
Navisphere Manager administrator’s
guide and online help
templates, and set up your monitoring configuration.
8
Server
Make LUNs available
to Tru64 UNIX
❑ Scan for new LUNs with the following command:
❑ hwmgr -scan scsi
Host connectivity guide for Tru64 UNIX
and Tru64 UNIX documentation
❑ Checkpoint — Verify that all LUNs in the Storage
Group are visible to the server with the following
command:
hwmgr -show scsi
❑ Create partition tables and the appropriate utilities for
the file systems you will be using with the disklabel
command.
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
Checklist - New Tru64 UNIX Server and New Storage System Without Boot Disk
6-5
Tru64 UNIX Installation Checklist
Checklist - New Tru64 UNIX Server and New Storage System With
Boot Disk
This checklist is for a new storage system that will contain a Tru64
UNIX boot disk. If you do not want the new storage system to contain
a boot disk, use the procedure that starts on page 6-4.
Task
1
Server
Install HBAs and
cables
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install the Fibre Channel HBAs.
HBA documentation
❑ Connect a cable from each host HBA port to a switch
port.
❑ Checkpoint — Verify the server connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for the switch port
connected to each HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that
the HBA is logged in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which
indicates that a 1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the
switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the
right LED is off, which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch port.
2
Storage System
Set Base UDID
❑ Set the Base UDID (UUID on screen) for the storage
system.
Host connectivity guide for Tru64 UNIX
and Tru64 UNIX documentation
If necessary, you can determine the available UDID
ranges for the server or cluster with the following
command:
wwidmgr -show wwid
6-6
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Tru64 UNIX Installation Checklist
Task
3
Switches
Zone single path to
SP
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Zone the switches to provide a single path from one
Switch management documentation
HBA (host initiator) to default SP owner of the boot disk
LUN in the storage system.
Do note zone more than one path to the storage system
at this point in the installation procedure. The
installation my fail if both SPs are visible to Tru64 UNIX.
You can zone multiple paths later in the installation
procedure.
❑ Checkpoint — Verify that the HBA connection is visible. Host connectivity guide for Tru64 UNIX
If it is not visible, execute the init command at the
server’s console.
4
Storage System
Set connection
properties
and Tru64 UNIX documentation
❑ Determine the port name and node name of each HBA Host connectivity guide for Tru64 UNIX
connected to the storage system.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to register the connection for Navisphere Manager administrator’s
each HBA with the following Initiator Record properties: guide and online help
Value
Property
Initiator Type
Compaq/Tru64
ArrayCommPath
Selected
Failover Mode
0
Unit Serial Number Array
5
Storage System
Bind Boot LUN
CAUTION The RAID Group for the boot LUN must consist of Navisphere Manager administrator’s
Fibre Channel disks (not ATA disks).
guide and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create a RAID Group for
the LUN that will be the system disk and bind that LUN.
❑ Create a Storage Group for the boot LUN.
❑ After the binding of the boot LUN is completed, use
Navisphere Manager to connect the server to its
Storage Group.
Checklist - New Tru64 UNIX Server and New Storage System With Boot Disk
6-7
Tru64 UNIX Installation Checklist
Task
6
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Prepare SRM
Console for Boot LUN ❑
At the SRM console, execute the init command.
Reference Document
Host connectivity guide for Tru64 UNIX
and Tru64 UNIX documentation
Verify that the boot LUN is visible to the console with the
following command:
wwidmgr -show wwid
❑ Execute the following command:
wwidmgr -quickset -udid udid-num
where udid-num is the UDID number of the boot LUN.
❑ At the SRM console, execute the init command.
❑ Checkpoint — Verify that the boot LUN is visible with
the following command:
show device
7
Server
❑
Install Tru64 UNIX on
❑
boot LUN
Install Tru64 UNIX on the boot LUN.
Host connectivity guide for Tru64 UNIX
and Tru64 UNIX documentation
Apply any required patches and driver updates.
❑ Create an entry in /etc/ddr.dbase to provide support for
CLARiiON LUNs.
❑ Shut down the server.
8
Switches
❑
Zone additional paths
9
Storage System
Update connection
information
Create the rest of the zones between the SPs and the
appropriate HBAs on the server.
Switch management documentation
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to disconnect the server from Navisphere Manager administrator’s
the Storage Group containing the boot LUN.
guide and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to register the remaining
connections for each HBA with the following Initiator
Record properties:
Property
Value
Initiator Type
Compaq/Tru64
ArrayCommPath
Selected
Failover Mode
0
Unit Serial Number Array
❑ Reconnect the server to the Storage Group containing
the boot LUN.
6-8
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Tru64 UNIX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
10 Server
❑
Update SRM Console
❑
for Boot LUN
At the SRM console, execute the init command.
Reference Document
Host connectivity guide for Tru64 UNIX
and Tru64 UNIX documentation
Execute the following command:
wwidmgr -quickset -udid udid-num
where udid-num is the UDID number of the boot LUN.
❑ At the SRM console, execute the init command again.
❑ Checkpoint — Verify that the boot LUN is visible with
the following command:
show device
Only one entry for the LUN should appear in the device
list for each path between the server and the storage
system.
❑ Set the boot LUN as default boot device with the
following command:
set bootdef_dev
being sure to include all paths to the boot LUN.
❑ Boot the server with the following command:
boot
11 Storage System
Set up security
❑ For Navisphere 6.X, use Navisphere Manager to define Navisphere security administrator’s
12 Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system
a global administrator (if not already defined) and any
additional users.
guide and Navisphere Manager online
help
properties.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create additional RAID
Groups (if desired), bind LUNs, and assign the LUNs to
the Storage Group.
13 Storage System
❑
Set up Event Monitor
Plan your monitoring configuration.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create
Navisphere Manager administrator’s
guide and online help
templates, and set up your monitoring configuration.
Checklist - New Tru64 UNIX Server and New Storage System With Boot Disk
6-9
Tru64 UNIX Installation Checklist
Task
With Access Logix
14 Server
Make LUNs available
to Tru64 UNIX
❑ After the binding of all LUNs is completed, scan for new Host connectivity guide for Tru64 UNIX
LUNs with the following command:
hwmgr -scan scsi
Reference Document
and Tru64 UNIX documentation
❑ Checkpoint — Verify that all LUNs in the Storage
Group are visible to the server with the following
command:
hwmgr -show scsi
❑ Create partition tables and the appropriate utilities for
the file systems you will be using with the disklabel
command.
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
6-10
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
7
Invisible Body Tag
Windows Installation
Checklists
This chapter contains checklists of the tasks required to install an
CLARiiON system in a configuration with a Windows® server and
PowerPath or VERITAS DMP failover software.
CX-Series refers to all the CX storage systems, except for the CX200LC.
The sections for the different configurations are
◆
◆
PowerPath Configurations for Windows .......................................7-2
DMP Configurations for Windows ...............................................7-57
Windows Installation Checklists
7-1
Windows Installation Checklists
PowerPath Configurations for Windows
Read this section if you are installing a Windows Server 2003 or
Windows 2000 PowerPath configuration with a new or existing
server and a new or existing storage system.
A new and existing server and a new and existing storage system are
defined as follows:
new server - A server running Windows Server 2003 or Windows
2000 and not connected to any storage system.
existing server - A server running Windows Server 2003 or
Windows 2000 that is already connected to one or more storage
systems.
new storage system - A CX300, CX500, CX500i, or CX700 storage
system that has the factory default settings and that has never been
connected to a server.
existing storage system - A CX-Series, FC4500, or FC4700-Series
storage system that is already connected to one or more servers and is
in a Navisphere domain.
All CLARiiON storage systems connected to a Windows server must be
CX-Series or FC-Series storage systems that are supported for that server. If
any other type of CLARiiON storage system is connected to the server, the
server cannot run PowerPath.
Topics in this section are
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
7-2
Required Host Software Revisions.................................................. 7-3
Prerequisites ....................................................................................... 7-4
Documentation................................................................................... 7-5
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and New Storage
System.................................................................................................. 7-7
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing
Storage System Without Boot Disk ............................................... 7-14
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing
Storage System With Boot Disk ..................................................... 7-25
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and New
Storage System ................................................................................. 7-37
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and Existing
Storage System ................................................................................. 7-45
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Windows Installation Checklists
Required Host
Software Revisions
◆
Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 operating system
revision and any service pack listed in the EMC Support Matrix on
the Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
HBA driver revision listed in the EMC Support Matrix on the
Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
Windows Server 2003 PowerPath
• For CX200, CX400, CX600, FC4500, FC4700-Series storage
systems
Version 3.0.5 or higher
• For CX300, CX500, and CX700 storage systems
Version 3.0.6 or higher
• For CX500i storage systems
Version 4.3.1 or higher
Refer to the EMC Support Matrix and the EMC PowerPath for Windows on
the Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com) for the specific
revision required for your Windows Server 2003 version.
◆
Windows 2000 PowerPath
• For CX200, CX400, CX600, and FC4700-Series storage systems
Version 3.0.0 or higher
• For CX300, CX500, and CX700 storage systems
Version 3.0.5 or higher
• For CX500i storage systems
Version 4.3.1 or higher
• For FC4500 storage systems
Version 3.0.0 with Patch 3.0.1 or higher
Refer to the EMC Support Matrix and the EMC PowerPath for Windows on
the Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com) for the specific
revision required for your Windows 2000 version.
PowerPath Configurations for Windows
7-3
Windows Installation Checklists
Prerequisites
◆
You must have a host that is
• Running an operating system that can support the Navisphere
Manager 6.X browser-based client. For an up-to-date list of
such operating systems, refer to the Navisphere Manager 6.X
release notes on http://powerlink.emc.com.
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system server
and that you will connect to the SP management ports in the
storage system.
◆
For most configurations, you must also have a host that is
• Running Navisphere 6.X CLI
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system server
and that you will connect to SP management ports in the
storage system.
◆
For an FC4500 storage system connected to a server on which you
will install PowerPath, you must have a computer that you can
connect to the storage system. This computer must run
• Windows 2000
• Navisphere Host Agent and CLI version 6.1 or higher
◆
You must have planned your LUNs and RAID Groups, and
Storage Groups if you have Access Logix. Be sure to consider
requirements for SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and
MirrorView/A if you have this software. The following
documents will help you with this planning:
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System CX200-Series Configuration
Planning Guide (P/N 014003115)
• EMC CLARiiON CX300, CX500, CX500i, and CX700 Storage
Systems Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 300-001-273)
• EMC CX400-Series and CX600-Series Storage Systems
Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003113)
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System Model FC4700-2
Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003087)
• EMC Fibre Channel Storage System Model FC4500, FC5300, and
FC5700 Configuration Planning Guide (P/N 014003039)
7-4
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Windows Installation Checklists
Documentation
Each checklist refers to some or all of the documents listed below. We
recommend that you load these documents on your service laptop.
◆
Documentation that ships with the HBA or NIC and HBA or NIC
driver.
The HBA documentation is also available from the following websites.
For Emulex HBAs and drivers:
http://www.emulex.com/ts/docoem/framemc.htm
For QLogic HBAs and drivers:
http://www.qlogic.com/support/drivers_software.asp
and select EMC in the OEM-approved Drivers/Firmware list at the
bottom of the page.
◆
Documentation that ships with the
• Fibre Channel switches and switch management software
• Microsoft Windows operating system
◆
Removing ATF or CDE Software Before Installing Other Failover
Software (P/N 069001173)
◆
PowerPath Version 4.3 Product Guide (P/N 300-001-673)
or
PowerPath Version 3.0 Product Guide (P/N 300-000-047)
◆
PowerPath for Windows Version 4.3 Installation and Administration
Guide (P/N 300-001-685)
or
PowerPath Version 3.0 Installation and Administration Guide for
Windows (P/N 300-001-045)
◆
EMC Navisphere Host Agent and CLI for Windows 2000 and NT
Version 6.X Installation Guide (P/N 069001151)
or
EMC CX-Series Server Software for Windows Installation Guide
(P/N300-002-038)
◆
EMC Navisphere Command Line Interface (CLI) Reference
(P/N 069001038)
◆
EMC SnapView Version 2.X Installation Guide (P/N 069001193,
revision A02 or higher)
◆
EMC SAN Copy Version 2.X Installation Guide (P/N 069001187)
PowerPath Configurations for Windows
7-5
Windows Installation Checklists
7-6
◆
EMC Rails and Enclosures Field Installation Guide
(P/N 300-001-799)
◆
EMC Rails and Enclosures Installation Guide for 19-Inch NEMA
Cabinets (P/N 014003082) - for SPS installation only
◆
EMC CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE) Setup Guide
(P/N 300-001-276, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX300 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-276, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX500 2-Gigabit Disk Processor Enclosure (DPE2)
Setup and Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-275, rev A01) and EMC
CLARiiON CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization
Guide (P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX500i 2-Gigabit iSCSI Disk Processor Enclosure
(DPE2) Setup Guide (300-001-924)
◆
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup
Guide (P/N 300-001-274, rev A02 or higher)
or
EMC CLARiiON CX700 Storage Processor Enclosure (SPE) Setup and
Cabling Guide (P/N 300-001-274), rev A01) and EMC CLARiiON
CX300, CX500, and CX700 Storage Systems Initialization Guide
(P/N 300-001-272)
◆
EMC 2-Gigabit Disk-Array Enclosure (DAE2) Setup and Cabling
Guide (P/N 014003104)
◆
EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001125)
◆
EMC Navisphere Security Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001124)
◆
EMC Host Connectivity Guide for Windows (P/N 300-000-603)
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Windows Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and New Storage
System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be completed
before the service provider arrives.
Task
1
2
With Access Logix
Reference Document
Server
Install HBAs or
NICs and driver
❑ Install HBAs or NICs.
❑ Install HBA or NIC driver.
HBA or NIC
documentation (for
HBAs, see URL on 7-5)
Server with
CX500i storage
system
For NICs
Microsoft documentation
❑ Download and install Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator.
❑ Use the appropriate Microsoft network tool (for example, Start > Settings
> Network Connections) to assign the network parameters (IP address,
subnet mask, and gateway) for each NIC.
For iSCSI HBAs
❑ Download and install QLogic SANsurfer.
QLogic SANsurfer
documentation
❑ Use SANsurfer to assign the network parameters (IP address, subnet
mask, and gateway) for each iSCSI HBA.
3
4
Server
Set HBA driver
properties
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to the values required for CLARiiON.
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O delays.
Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Install PowerPath.
❑ Reboot the server to complete the installation of PowerPath.
Contrary to what the PowerPath documentation states, PowerPath will not
see any logical disks (LUNs) in the storage system at this point because
the storage system has not been connected.
Host connectivity guide
and HBA or NIC
documentation (for
HBAs, see URL on 7-5)
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath for
Windows installation
and administrator’s
guide
❑ Install any PowerPath patches from the Software downloads page on the
EMC Powerlink website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and New Storage System
7-7
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
5
Server
Install Host
Agent or Server
Utility
With Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent or Navisphere Server Utility and the
CX-Series Server
Software for Windows
installation guide
Navisphere CLI.
❑ For a CX500i storage system
Reboot server either after the Host Agent installation is complete or when
the Server Utility dialog prompts you to reboot.
If you do not reboot before you run the Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator to
configure iSCSI NIC initiators, the initiators will not log in to the storage
system.
6
Server
Install admsnap
and/or admhost
❑ If the server will be a SnapView production or secondary host, install the
admsnap utility.
❑ If the server has LUNs that will participate in a SAN Copy session, install
CX-Series Server
Software for Windows
installation guide
the admhost utility.
7
Fibre Channel
Switches
Install
For a Fibre Channel SAN
❑ Install Fibre Channel switches, if not already installed.
Rails, cabinet, and
switch documentation
❑ Connect a cable from each host HBA port to a switch port.
❑ Checkpoint - Verify the HBA connection to the switch by checking the
LED(s) for the switch port connected to the HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
7-8
8
Storage System
Install
❑ Install the storage system in the cabinet, if not already installed.
Rails and cabinet
documentation
9
Storage System
Cable
management
ports
❑ Cable the storage-system management port on each SP to the network
Storage-system setup
guide
from which you will manage the storage system.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
10 Storage System
Initialize and
install software
enablers
❑ Install the Navisphere Initialization Utility on a host on the same subnet as Storage-system setup
the storage-system management ports.
guides installation guide
❑ Use the Navisphere Initialization Utility to initialize the storage system.
❑ If you have SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and/or MirrorView/A
software, install their enablers.
11 Storage System
Cable data ports
to Fibre Channel
switch, network,
or server
Reference Document
For a CX300, CX500, or CX700 Storage System
❑ Connect the storage-system Fibre Channel data ports to the Fibre Channel
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage-system setup
guide.
switch or HBA ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a Fibre Channel SAN, verify the storage-system
Switch documentation
connections to the Fibre Channel switches by checking the LED(s) for the
switch port connected to each SP port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the SP is logged
in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
For a CX500i Storage System
❑ Connect the storage-system iSCSI data ports to the network or NIC or
Storage-system setup
guide
HBA ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a network connection with the server, verify the
Switch documentation
storage-system connections to the network router or switch by checking
the LED(s) for the router or switch port connected to each SP port.
12 CX500i Storage
System
Configure iSCSI
storage-system
data ports
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to configure network parameters for the
storage-system iSCSI data ports.
Storage-system setup
guide and Manager
online help
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and New Storage System
7-9
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
13 Server With
For NICs
Storage-system setup
CX500i Storage
guide
❑ Use Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator on the server to configure the iSCSI
System
initiators for each NIC port.
Configure server
iSCSI initiator
For iSCSI HBAs
ports
❑ Use QLogic SANsurfer to configure the network parameters for each HBA
port.
14 Storage System
Set up security
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to define a global administrator and domain (if
not already defined) and any additional users.
15 Storage System ❑
Set Properties for
PowerPath
Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the following default
storage-system properties:
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
Navisphere CLI
reference
navicli -h hostname systemtype -config 3
navicli -h hostname failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the storage
system.
16 FIbre Channel
Switches
Zone additional
paths
For a Fibre Channel SAN
❑ Zone the Fibre Channel switches to provide a path from each HBA port
(host initiator) to the appropriate SPs.
Fibre Channel switch
management
documentation
❑ If SAN Copy, MirrorView, or MirrorView/A is installed, create any required
zones.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify the switch
connections to the storage system.
17 Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Restart the Host Agent or run the Navisphere Server Utility, then use the
Disk Management tool to scan for disks.
If the disks are not visible, scan for them once more.
Storage-system setup
guide and Windows
documentation
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere Manager’s Connectivity Status dialog box to Navisphere Manager
verify that each HBA or NIC is registered with the storage system.
18 Storage System
Install optional
software
7-10
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ If you have optional SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView/A, and/or MirrorView Storage-system setup
/S software that you ordered, install its enabler.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
guide and Navisphere
Manager administrator’s
guide and online help
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
19 Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group
❑ Reboot the server so Windows Server 2003 or Windows_2000 recognizes Windows documentation
the LUNs.
Now the LUNs in the Storage Group look like any other disks in the server.
❑ Checkpoint - Use one of the following ways to verify that PowerPath sees PowerPath product
all the paths to the LUNs:
• PowerPath Administrator (Start > Programs > EMC > PowerPath
Administrator)
guide
• PowerPath command
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your PowerPath license key if you have one.
• Verify that the storage-system properties are as defined in step 15.
20 Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
21 CX500i Storage
System
Configure
optional CHAP
security
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to configure CHAP on the storage system, but
❑
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
your monitoring configuration.
do not enable it yet.
Storage-system setup
guide and Manager
online help
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and New Storage System
7-11
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
22 Server With
CX500i Storage
System
Configure
optional CHAP
security
If you configured CHAP security for the storage system, you must configure it for Storage-system setup
the server’s iSCSI initiators.
guide and Manager
online help
For NIC Initiators
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to enable CHAP on the storage system.
❑ Use Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator to configure initiator CHAP on the
NIC initiators.
For iSCSI HBA Initiators
❑ Use QLogic SANsurfer to configure initiator CHAP on the HBA initiators.
Storage-system setup
guide and Microsoft
documentation
Storage-system setup
guide and SANsurfer
documentation
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to enable CHAP on the storage system
Storage-system setup
guide and Manager
online help
23 Server
Make LUNs
available to
Windows
❑ Prepare the LUNs to receive data by creating partitions on them.
Host connectivity guide
or Windows
documentation
24 Windows Server
2003 Server
Install optional
CLARiiON VSS
provider
❑ If you want applications to access SnapView functionality on the storage
CX-Series Server
Software for Windows
Installation Guide
system using the VSS framework or other APIs, Install the optional
CLARiiON VSS provider on the server.
Note that Navisphere CLI must be installed on the server.
25 Server
If you have a PowerPath license key
PowerPath product
Test PowerPath Note If your PowerPath license key is not registered, the load balancing policy is guide
with a license key restricted to basic failover.
❑ View the LUNs available to the server using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
7-12
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
PowerPath product
guide
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
25 Server
❑
Test PowerPath
with a license key
(cont.)
Reference Document
Identify the HBA or NIC sending I/O to LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and disconnect the cable to
that HBA or NIC.
❑ View the output of the powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and
verify that
• The state of the uncabled path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining path(s) to the LUN, indicating that the
path failover was successful, and PowerPath is working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you disconnected from the HBA or NIC.
❑ If you did not follow the above steps exactly and caused any LUNs to
trespass, restore the LUNs to their original SP with the following PowerPath
command:
powermt restore
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and New Storage System
7-13
Windows Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing Storage
System Without Boot Disk
This checklist is for an existing storage system that will not contain a
Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 boot disk. If you want the
existing storage system to contain a boot disk, use the procedure that
starts on 7-25.
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be completed
before the service provider arrives.
The Without Access Logix column does not apply to CX300, CX500, CX500i,
and CX700 storage systems because they ship from the factory with the
Access Logix enabler installed.
Task
1
2
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Server
Install HBAs or
NICs and driver
❑ Install HBAs or NICs.
❑ Install HBAs.
❑ Install HBA or NIC driver.
❑ Install HBA driver.
HBA or NIC
documentation for
HBAs, see URL on 7-5)
Server with
CX500i storage
system
For NICs
N/A
❑ Download and install Microsoft
iSCSI Software Initiator.
❑ Use the appropriate Microsoft
Microsoft documentation
network tool (for example, Start >
Settings > Network
Connections) to assign the
network parameters (IP address,
subnet mask, and gateway) for
each NIC.
For iSCSI HBAs
❑ Download and install QLogic
SANsurfer.
❑ Use SANsurfer to assign the
network parameters (IP address,
subnet mask, and gateway) for
each iSCSI HBA.
7-14
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
QLogic SANsurfer
documentation
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
3
4
With Access Logix
Server
Set HBA driver
properties
Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Server
Install Host
Agent or Server
Utility
Reference Document
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to ❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to Host connectivity guide
the values required for
CLARiiON.
the values required for
CLARiiON.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
Install PowerPath.
❑ Reboot the server to complete
5
Without Access Logix
❑ Install PowerPath.
❑ Reboot the server to complete
the installation of PowerPath.
the installation of PowerPath.
Contrary to what the PowerPath
documentation states, PowerPath
will not see any logical disks
(LUNs) in the storage system at
this point because the storage
system has not been connected.
Contrary to what the PowerPath
documentation states, PowerPath
will not see any logical disks
(LUNs) in the storage system at
this point because the storage
system has not been connected.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
http://powerlink.emc.com
and HBA documentation
(for HBAs, see URL on
7-5)
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath for
Windows installation
and administrator’s
guide0-
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent ❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent CX-Series Server
or Navisphere Server Utility and
Navisphere CLI.
❑ For a CX500i storage system,
or Navisphere Server Utility and
Navisphere CLI.
Software Installation
guide for Windows or
Windows Agent and CLI
installation guide
reboot server either after the Host
Agent installation is complete or
when the Server Utility dialog
prompts you to reboot.
If you do not reboot before you
run the Microsoft iSCSI Software
Initiator to configure iSCSI NIC
initiators, the initiators will not log
in to the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing Storage System Without Boot Disk
7-15
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
6
Server
Install admsnap
and/or admhost
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ If the server will be a SnapView
N/A
CX-Series Server
Software for Windows
installation guide or
SnapView installation
guide (revision A02 or
higher)
production or secondary host,
install the admsnap utility.
❑ If the server has LUNs that will
CX-Series Server
Software for Windows
installation guide or SAN
Copy installation guide
participate in a SAN Copy
session, install the admhost
utility.
7
8
9
Storage System
Update software
❑ If currently installed
Navisphere Manager
storage-system software is not at administrator’s guide
the required minimum revision,
and online help
update it.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access
to data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access
to data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
Server
Connect to
storage-system
management
LAN
❑ Cable the server to the LAN
Server
Cable to Fibre
Channel
switches,
network, or
storage-system
data ports
For a CX200, CX300, CX400, CX500, For a CX200, CX300, CX400, CX500, Storage-system setup
CX600, or CX700 storage system
CX600, or CX700 storage system
guide
connected to the storage-system
management port on each SP.
❑ Cable the server to the LAN
Storage-system setup
connected to the storage-system guide
management port on each SP.
❑ Cable the HBA ports to the Fibre ❑ Cable the HBA ports to the Fibre
Channel switch connected to the
storage system or to the
storage-system Fibre Channel
data ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
7-16
❑ If currently installed
storage-system software is not at
the required minimum revision,
update it.
Channel switch connected to the
storage system or to the
storage-system Fibre Channel
data ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
the HBA connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for
the switch port connected to each
HBA port.
the storage-system connections
to the switch by checking the
LED(s) for the switch port
connected to each HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Switch documentation
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
9
With Access Logix
Server
Cable to Fibre
Channel
switches,
network, or
storage-system
data ports (cont.)
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the Switch documentation
following:
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which
indicates that a 1-Gbit SP port
is logged in to the switch port.
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which
indicates that a 1-Gbit SP port
is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
For a CX500i storage system
❑ Cable the HBA or NICs ports to
Storage-system setup
guide
the network connected to the
storage-system iSCSI data ports
or directly to the storage-system
iSCSI data ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a network
Switch documentation
connection with the server, verify
the storage-system connections
to the network router or switch by
checking the LED(s) for the router
or switch port connected to each
SP port.
10 Server With a
For NICs
N/A
CX500i Storage
❑ Use Microsoft iSCSI Software
System
Initiator on the server to configure
Configure server
the iSCSI initiators for each NIC
iSCSI initiator
port.
ports
For iSCSI HBAs
Storage-system setup
guide
❑ Use QLogic SANsurfer to
configure the iSCSI initiators for
each HBA port.
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing Storage System Without Boot Disk
7-17
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
11 Fibre Channel
Switches
Zone additional
paths
For a Fibre Channel SAN
For a Fibre Channel SAN
❑ Zone the Fibre Channel switches ❑
to provide a path from each HBA
port (host initiator) to the
appropriate SPs.
Reference Document
Fibre Channel switch
management
Zone the Fibre Channel switches
documentation
to provide a path from each HBA
port (host initiator) to the
appropriate SPs.
❑ If SAN Copy, MirrorView, or
MirrorView/A is installed, create
any required zones.
❑
Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
❑
Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
For a CX-Series or
FC4700-Series storage system,
go to step 13.
For an FC4500 storage system,
go to step 14.
12 Storage System ❑
Register HBAs or
NICs
On the server, restart the
N/A
Navisphere Host Agent or run the
Navisphere Server Utility.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
Manager’s Connectivity Status
dialog box to verify that each HBA
or NIC is registered with the
storage system.
7-18
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere Host Agent
and CLI for Windows
installation guide or
storage-system setup
guide
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
13 CX-Series or
❑
FC4700-Series
Storage System
Set properties for
PowerPath
Without Access Logix
Use Navisphere Manager’s
❑
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s HBA or NIC ports
(initiators):
Initiator Type to CLARiiON Open
Failover mode to 1
Array commpath to Enabled
Go to step 15.
Reference Document
Use the following Navisphere CLI Navisphere Manager
command to determine the
administrator’s guide
default storage-system type:
and online help or
Navisphere CLI
navicli -h hostname systemtype
reference
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI Navisphere CLI
commands to set the default
failover mode and array
commpath properties to the
values for PowerPath:
reference
navicli -h hostname
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
Go to step 15.
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing Storage System Without Boot Disk
7-19
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
14 FC4500 Storage ❑
System
Set properties for
❑
PowerPath
Connect a computer to the serial
port on the storage system.
Without Access Logix
❑ Connect a computer to the serial Storage-system setup
port on the storage system
From the computer connected to ❑
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s HBA or NIC ports
(initiators):
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -type 3
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -arraycommpath 1
where
device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
servername is the name of the
server with the HBAs.
Reference Document
guide
From the computer connected to Navisphere CLI
the storage system’s serial port, reference
use the following Navisphere CLI
command to determine the
default storage-system type:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype -config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
❑ From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
15 Server
Make target SPs
available
7-20
❑ Use the Disk Management tool to ❑ Use the Disk Management tool to Windows documentation
scan for disks.
scan for disks.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
16 Storage System
Configure
❑ If the server will use an existing
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage Group, use Navisphere
Manager to connect the server to
the Storage Group.
❑ If the server will use a new
Storage Group, use Navisphere
Manager to create RAID Groups,
bind LUNs, create the Storage
Group, and assign LUNs to the
Storage Group.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
connect the server to the Storage
Group.
❑ Reboot the server so Windows
❑ Reboot the server so Windows
recognizes the LUNs.
recognizes the LUNs
Now the LUNs in the Storage
Group look like any other disks in
the server.
Now the LUNs look like any other
disks in the server.
❑ Checkpoint - Use one of the
❑ Checkpoint - Use one of the
following ways to verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs:
following ways to verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs:
• PowerPath Administrator
(Start > Programs > EMC >
PowerPath Administrator)
• PowerPath Administrator
(Start > Programs > EMC >
PowerPath Administrator)
• PowerPath command
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
• PowerPath command
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection
to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 13 or 14.
Windows documentation
PowerPath product
guide
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 13 or 14.
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing Storage System Without Boot Disk
7-21
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
16 Storage System For an FC4500 storage system
Configure (cont.) ❑ Disconnect the computer from
the serial port on the storage
system.
17 CX500i Storage
System
Configure
optional
storage-system
CHAP security
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
For an FC4500 storage system
Storage-system setup
guide
❑ Disconnect the computer from
the serial port on the storage
system.
If CHAP security is configured for the N/A
storage-system SP port connected to
a new NIC or HBA initiator, the new
initiator must use CHAP. If you want a
new initiator to use the credentials
already set for that SP port, you do not
need to configure the storage-system
CHAP for the new initiator.
Storage-system setup
guide
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
configure initiator CHAP on the
storage system for each new NIC
or HBA that needs it configured.
18 Server With
CX500i Storage
System
Configure
optional server
CHAP security
If you configured CHAP security on the N/A
storage system, you must configure it
for the server’s iSCSI Initiator.
Storage-system setup
guide and Manager
online help
For NIC Initiators
❑ If CHAP is not already enabled on
the storage system, use
Navisphere Manager to enable it.
❑ Use Microsoft iSCSI Software
N/A
Initiator to configure initiator
CHAP on the NIC initiators on the
server.
For iSCSI HBAs
Storage-system setup
guide and Microsoft
documentation
N/A
❑ If CHAP is already enabled on the
storage system, use Navisphere
Manager to disable it.
❑ Use QLogic SANsurfer to
N/A
Storage-system setup
guide and SANsurfer
documentation
N/A
Storage-system setup
guide and Manager
online help
configure initiator CHAP on the
HBA initiators on the server.
❑ If you disabled CHAP on the
storage system, use Navisphere
Manager to re-enable CHAP on
the storage system.
7-22
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
19 Server
Make LUNs
available to
Windows
❑ Prepare any new LUNs to receive ❑ Prepare any new LUNs to receive Host connectivity guide
20 Windows Server
2003 Server
Install optional
CLARiiON VSS
provider
❑ If you want applications to access N/A
data by creating partitions on
them.
data by creating partitions on
them.
Reference Document
or Windows
documentation
CX-Series Server
Software for Windows
Installation Guide
SnapView functionality on the
storage system using the VSS
framework or other APIs, Install
the optional CLARiiON VSS
provider on the server.
Note that Navisphere CLI must
be installed on the server.
21 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
If you have a PowerPath license key If you have a PowerPath license key PowerPath product
guide
If your PowerPath license key is not
If your PowerPath license key is not
registered, the load balancing policy is registered, the load balancing policy is
restricted to basic failover.
restricted to basic failover.
❑ View the LUNs available to the
❑ View the LUNs available to the
server using the following
PowerPath command:
server using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to
❑ Choose one available LUN to
receive I/O for the test.
receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen
❑ View the paths to the chosen
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA or NIC sending
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
I/O to LUN by viewing the output
of the powermt display dev=x
every=2 command, and
disconnect the cable to that HBA
or NIC.
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing Storage System Without Boot Disk
7-23
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
21 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key (cont.)
❑ View the output of the powermt
❑ View the output of the powermt
PowerPath product
guide
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA or
NIC.
❑ If you did not follow the above
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
powermt restore
powermt restore
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
7-24
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Windows Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing Storage
System With Boot Disk
This checklist is for an existing storage system that will contain a
Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 boot disk. If you do not want
the existing storage system to contain a boot disk, use the procedure
that starts on 7-14.
!
CAUTION
The RAID Group containing the boot LUN must consist of Fibre
Channel disks (not ATA disks).
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be completed
before the service provider arrives.
The Without Access Logix column does not apply to CX300, CX500, CX500i,
and CX700 storage systems because they ship from the factory with the
Access Logix enabler installed.
Task
1
2
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
Server
Install HBA s
❑ Install HBAs.
❑ Install HBAs.
HBA documentation
(see URL on 7-5)
Server
Set HBA driver
properties
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to Host connectivity guide and HBA or
Note: A CX500i storage system
cannot have a boot disk if it is
connected to NICs in the server.
the values required for
CLARiiON.
NIC documentation (for HBAs, see
URL on 7-5)
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
3
Server
Connect to
storage-system
management
LAN
❑ Cable the server to the LAN
connected to the storage-system
management port on each SP.
❑ Cable the server to the LAN
Storage-system setup
connected to the storage-system guide
management port on each SP.
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing Storage System With Boot Disk
7-25
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
4
With Access Logix
Server
Cable to Fibre
Channel
switches,
network, or
storage-system
data ports
7-26
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
For SAN with CX200, CX300, CX400, For SAN with CX200, CX400, or
Storage-system setup
CX500, CX600, or CX700 storage
CX600 storage systems
guide
systems
❑ Cable the HBA ports to the Fibre
❑ Cable the HBA ports to the Fibre
Channel switch connected to the
Channel switch connected to the
storage system.
storage system.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
the HBA connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for
the switch port connected to each
HBA port.
the storage-system connections
to the switch by checking the
LED(s) for the switch port
connected to each HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which
indicates that a 1-Gbit SP port
is logged in to the switch port.
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which
indicates that a 1-Gbit SP port
is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
4
Server
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
For direct attach with CX200,
CX300, CX400, CX500, CX600, or
CX700 storage systems
For direct attach
Storage-system setup
guide.
Cable to Fibre
❑ Cable the server to the storage
Channel
system so only a maximum of
❑ Cable the server to the storage
switches,
one path exists from the server to
system so only a maximum of
network, or
each SP.
one path exists from the server to
storage-system
This means that for a multiple
each SP.
data ports (cont.)
HBA port server, you cable just
This means that for a multiple
one HBA port to one SP. You will
HBA port server, you cable just
cable additional HBA ports to the
one HBA port to one SP. You will
SPs after you set up the boot
cable additional HBA ports to the
disk.
SPs after you set up the boot
disk.
For a network with a CX500i storage N/A
system
❑ Cable the server to the network
connected to the storage-system
data ports o only a maximum of
one path exists from the server to
each SP.
This means that for a multiple
HBA port server, you cable just
one HBA port to one SP. You will
cable additional HBA ports to the
SPs after you set up the boot
disk.
5
Storage System
Configure
❑ If the server will use an existing
Storage Group, use Navisphere
Manager to connect the server to
the Storage Group.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ If the server will use a new
Storage Group, use Navisphere
Manager to create RAID Groups,
bind LUNs, create the Storage
Group, and assign LUNs to the
Storage Group.
CAUTION The RAID Group for
the boot LUN must consist of
Fibre Channel disks (not ATA
disks).
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
connect the server to the Storage
Group.
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing Storage System With Boot Disk
7-27
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
5
With Access Logix
Storage System ❑
Configure (cont.)
Reboot the server so Windows
Server 2003 or Windows 2000
recognizes the LUNs.
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Reboot the server so Windows
Windows documentation
Server 2003 or Windows 2000
recognizes the LUNs.
Now the LUNs in the Storage
Group look like any other disks in
the server.
6
7
8
Server
Create HBA
driver diskette
❑ Create a diskette with the EMC
❑ Create a diskette with the EMC
HBA driver from the HBA
vendor’s web site.
HBA driver from the HBA
vendor’s web site
Server
❑
Set up HBA BIOS
Fibre Channel
Switches
Zone
Storage System
Register HBAs
10 Server
Prepare for
installing
operating
system
11 Server
Install Windows
Server 2003 or
Windows 2000
If required, either update the
Emulex HBA firmware and/or
BIOS or update the QLogic HBA
firmware and/or NVRAM.
Emulex HBA firmware and/or
BIOS or update the QLogic HBA
firmware and/or NVRAM.
❑ Reboot the server.
❑ Set up HBA BIOS.
❑ Set up HBA BIOS.
For a Fibre Channel SAN
For a Fibre Channel SAN
URL on 7-5
HBA documentation
(see URL on 7-5)
Switch management
❑ Zone the Fibre Channel switches ❑ Zone the Fibre Channel switches documentation
to provide a single from the
server to each SP.
to provide a single from the
server to each SP.
Checkpoint - Use Fibre Channel ❑
switch management software to
verify the switch connections to
the storage system.
Checkpoint - Use Fibre Channel
switch management software to
verify the switch connections to
the storage system
❑ Use Navisphere Manager’s
N/A
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Connectivity Status dialog box
to register each HBA with the
storage system.
❑ Disconnect any SCSI hard disk
❑ Disconnect any SCSI hard disk
connected to the server.
connected to the server.
❑ Configure the HBA boot BIOS.
❑ Configure the HBA boot BIOS.
❑ Install Windows Server 2003 or
❑ Install Windows Server 2003 or
Windows 2000 and the HBA
driver on the boot LUN in the
storage system.
Note: During the installation
procedure, you will partition the boot
LUN.
7-28
❑ If required, either update the
❑ Reboot the server.
❑
9
Now the LUNs look like any other
disks in the server.
Windows 2000 and the HBA
driver on the boot LUN in the
storage system.
Note: During the installation
procedure, you will partition the boot
LUN
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HBA documentation
(see URL on 7-5)
Windows documentation
and HBA documentation
(see URL on 7-5)
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
12 Server
Set HBA driver
properties
❑ Reinstall HBA driver.
❑ Reinstall HBA driver.
HBA documentation
(see URL on 7-5)
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to ❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to
the values required for
CLARiiON.
the values required for
CLARiiON.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
13 Storage System For a CX-Series or FC4700-Series
For a CX-Series or FC4700-Series
storage system
Set properties for storage system
PowerPath
❑ Use Navisphere Manager’s
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
command to determine the
from the Tools menu on the
default storage-system type:
toolbar) to set the following
navicli -h hostname systemtype
storage-system properties for the
where hostname is the IP
server’s HBA ports (initiators):
address or network name of an
Initiator Type to CLARiiON Open
SP in the storage system.
Failover mode to 1
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Array commpath to Enabled
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help or
Navisphere CLI
reference
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI Navisphere CLI
commands to set the default
failover mode and array
commpath properties to the
values for PowerPath:
reference
navicli -h hostname
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing Storage System With Boot Disk
7-29
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
13 Storage System For an FC4500 storage system
For an FC4500 storage system
Set properties for ❑ Connect a computer to the serial ❑ Connect a computer to the serial
PowerPath
port on the storage system.
port on the storage system
(cont.)
❑ From the computer connected to ❑ From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
command to determine the
storage-system properties for the
default storage-system type:
server’s HBA ports (initiators):
navicli -np -d device
systemtype
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
where device is the name of the
servername -type 3
computer port connected to the
navicli -np -d device
storage-system serial port (for
storagegroup -sethost -host
example, com1).
servername -failovermode 1
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
navicli -np -d device
Open), use the following
storagegroup -sethost -host
Navisphere CLI command to set
servername -arraycommpath 1
it to 3:
where
navicli -np -d device
device is the name of the
systemtype -config 3
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
CAUTION The above command
example, com1).
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
servername is the name of the
server with the HBAs.
For an FC4500 storage system
❑ From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
7-30
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide
Navisphere CLI
reference
Navisphere CLI
reference
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
14 Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Install PowerPath.
❑ Reboot the server to complete
15 Fibre Channel
Switches
Zone additional
paths
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install PowerPath.
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath for
Windows installation
and administrator’s
guide
❑ Reboot the server to complete
the installation of PowerPath.
the installation of PowerPath.
Contrary to what the PowerPath
documentation states, PowerPath
will not see any logical disks
(LUNs) in the storage system at
this point because the storage
system has not been connected.
Contrary to what the PowerPath
documentation states, PowerPath
will not see any logical disks
(LUNs) in the storage system at
this point because the storage
system has not been connected.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
http://powerlink.emc.com
❑ Zone the Fibre Channel switches ❑ Zone the FIbre Channel switches Switch management
to provide an additional paths
from the server to each SP.
to provide an additional paths
from the server to each SP.
documentation
❑ If SAN Copy, MirrorView, or
MirrorView/A is installed, create
any required zones.
❑
Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
❑
Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing Storage System With Boot Disk
7-31
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
15 Fibre Channel
Switches
Zone additional
paths (cont.)
❑ Checkpoint - Use one of the
❑ Checkpoint - Use one of the
PowerPath product
guide
following ways to verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs:
• PowerPath Administrator
(Start > Programs > EMC >
PowerPath Administrator)
following ways to verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs:
• PowerPath Administrator
(Start > Programs > EMC >
PowerPath Administrator)
• PowerPath command
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
• PowerPath command
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection
to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 13.
For an FC4500 storage system
For an FC4500 storage system
❑ Disconnect the computer from
❑ Disconnect the computer from
the serial port on the storage
system.
7-32
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 13.
the serial port on the storage
system.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Storage-system setup
guide
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
16 Server (direct
attach only)
Cable additional
paths
❑ For a direct attach configuration,
❑ For a direct attach configuration,
Storage-system setup
cable any additional HBA ports to guide
SP ports.
cable any additional HBA ports to
SP ports.
❑ Checkpoint - Use one of the
❑ Checkpoint - Use one of the
following ways to verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs:
• PowerPath Administrator
(Start > Programs > EMC >
PowerPath Administrator)
following ways to verify that
PowerPath sees all the paths to
the LUNs:
• PowerPath Administrator
(Start > Programs > EMC >
PowerPath Administrator)
• PowerPath command
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
• PowerPath command
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection
to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
PowerPath product
guide
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 13.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 13.
For an FC4500 storage system
For an FC4500 storage system
❑ Disconnect the computer from
❑ Disconnect the computer from
the serial port on the storage
system.
17 Server
Install Host
Agent or Server
Utility
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide
the serial port on the storage
system.
❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent ❑ Install the Navisphere Host Agent CX-Series Server
18 Server With a
❑
CX500i Storage
System
Configure server ❑
iSCSI HBA
initiator ports
or Navisphere Server Utility and
the Navisphere CLI.
Download and install QLogic
SANsurfer.
or Server Utility and the
Navisphere CLI.
N/A
Software for Windows
installation guide or
Navisphere Host Agent
and CLI for Windows
installation guide
Storage-system setup
guide
Use QLogic SANsurfer to
configure the network parameters
for each or for each HBA.
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing Storage System With Boot Disk
7-33
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
19 Server
Install admsnap
and/or admhost
❑ If the server will be a SnapView
N/A
CX-Series Server
Software for Windows
installation guide
❑ If you want applications to access N/A
CX-Series Server
Software for Windows
Installation Guide
production or secondary host,
install the admsnap utility.
❑ If the server has LUNs that will
participate in a SAN Copy
session, install the admhost
utility.
20 Windows Server
2003 Server
Install optional
CLARiiON VSS
provider
SnapView functionality on the
storage system using the VSS
framework or other APIs, Install
the optional CLARiiON VSS
provider on the server.
Note that Navisphere CLI must
be installed on the server.
21 CX500i Storage
System
Configure
optional
storage-system
CHAP security
If CHAP security is configured for the N/A
storage-system SP port connected to
a new NIC or HBA initiator, the new
initiator must use CHAP. If you want a
new initiator to use the credentials
already set for that SP port, you do not
need to configure the storage-system
CHAP for the new initiator.
Storage-system setup
guide and Manager
online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
configure initiator CHAP on the
storage system for each new NIC
or HBA that needs it configured.
22 Server With
CX500i Storage
System
Configure
optional server
CHAP security
If you configured CHAP security on the N/A
storage system, you must configure it
for any new iSCSI HBA initiators in the
storage system.
❑ If CHAP is already enabled on the
Storage-system setup
guide and Manager
online help
storage system, use Navisphere
Manager to disable it.
❑ Use QLogic SANsurfer to
N/A
Storage-system setup
guide and Microsoft
documentation
N/A
Storage-system setup
guide and Manager
online help
configure initiator CHAP on the
new HBA initiators on the server.
❑ If you disabled CHAP on the
storage system, use Navisphere
Manager to re-enable CHAP on
the storage system.
7-34
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
23 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
If you have a PowerPath license key If you have a PowerPath license key PowerPath product
guide
If your PowerPath license key is not
If your PowerPath license key is not
registered, the load balancing policy is registered, the load balancing policy is
restricted to basic failover.
restricted to basic failover.
❑ View the LUNs available to the
❑ View the LUNs available to the
server using the following
PowerPath command:
server using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to
❑ Choose one available LUN to
receive I/O for the test.
receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen
❑ View the paths to the chosen
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
❑ View the output of the powermt
❑ View the output of the powermt
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
Reference Document
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
PowerPath Checklist — New Windows Server and Existing Storage System With Boot Disk
7-35
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
23 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key (cont.)
❑ If you did not follow the above
❑ If you did not follow the above
24 Server
Make new LUNs
available to
Windows
Reference Document
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
PowerPath product
steps exactly and caused any
guide
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
powermt restore
powermt restore
❑ Prepare any new LUN, other than ❑ Prepare any new LUN, other than Host connectivity guide
the boot LUN, to receive data by
creating partitions on them.
the boot LUN, to receive data by
creating partitions on them.
or Windows
documentation
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
7-36
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Windows Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and New
Storage System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be performed
before the service provider arrives, except for the removal of ATF or
CDE, which you can have done by EMC Professional Services.
!
CAUTION
EMC no longer supports ATF or CDE. Before you transition your
server from ATF or CDE to PowerPath, you must
◆
Back up your server configurations.
◆
Back up data on all storage systems connected to the server.
◆
Remove ATF or CDE, which EMC recommends that EMC
Professional Services do, especially if your server configuration
is complex. If you want to remove it yourself, you must use the
procedure in the Removing ATF or CDE Software Before
Installing Other Failover Software document (P/N 069001173),
which is on the Powerlink website with this roadmap.
Simply removing ATF or CDE using the uninstall procedure in
the Windows ATF administrator’s guide or the Windows
utilities administrator’s guide may not return the server to its
original state, and may result in lost data.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and New Storage System
7-37
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
1
With Access Logix
Server
Remove ATF or
CDE
Reference Document
❑ If ATF or CDE is installed, then before continuing either remove it yourself Removing ATF or CDE
(see caution before this checklist) or arrange to have EMC Professional
Services remove it.
CAUTION When you are prompted to restart the system during the ATF
removal procedure, answer No and then click Finish.Do not reboot until
you install PowerPath, even if the instructions for installing software (e.g.
HBA driver) tell you to do so.
2
3
4
Server
Install additional
HBA or NICs
❑ If you need additional HBAs or NICs to provide more paths to the storage HBA or NIC
Server
Update Software
❑ If the following software is currently installed and not at the required
Server
Set HBA or NIC
driver properties
system, install these HBAs.
CAUTION Do not connect cables to the HBAs until you are told to do so
later in this procedure.
minimum revision ( 7-3), update it:
• HBA or NIC driver
• Navisphere Host Agent
• admsnap
• admhost
❑ Make sure the HBA or NIC driver parameters are set to the values
required for CLARiiON.
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O delays.
For additional NICs
documentation (for
HBAs see URL on 7-5)
HBA or NIC
documentation (or HBAs
see URL on 7-5)
CX-Series Server
Software Installation
guide for Windows
HBA or NIC
documentation (for
HBAs, see URL on 7-5)
Microsoft documentation
❑ Use the appropriate Microsoft network tool (for example, Start > Settings
> Network Connections) to assign the network parameters (IP address,
subnet mask, and gateway) for each NIC.
For additional iSCSI HBAs
❑ Use SANsurfer to assign the network parameters (IP address, subnet
mask, and gateway) for each iSCSI HBA.
7-38
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
QLogic SANsurfer
documentation
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
5
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install PowerPath
❑
Reference Document
Install PowerPath.
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath for
Reboot the server to complete the installation of PowerPath.
Windows installation
Contrary to what the PowerPath documentation states, PowerPath will not and administrator’s
see any logical disks (LUNs) in the storage system at this point because guide
the storage system has not been connected.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches from the Software downloads page on the
EMC Powerlink website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
6
Storage System
Install
❑ Install the storage system in the cabinet, if not already installed.
Rails and cabinet
documentation
7
Storage System
Cable
management
ports
❑ Cable the storage-system management port on each SP to the network
Storage-system setup
guide
Storage System
Initialize and
install software
enablers
❑ Install the Navisphere Initialization Utility on a host on the same subnet as Storage-system setup
8
from which you will management the storage system.
the storage-system management ports.
guide
❑ Use the Navisphere Initialization Utility to initialize the storage system.
❑ If you have SAN Copy, SnapView, MirrorView, and/or MirrorView/A
software, install their enablers.
For a CX300, CX500, or CX700 storage system, continue to step 10.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
For a CX500i storage system, go to step 11.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and New Storage System
7-39
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
9
With Access Logix
CX300, CX500, or ❑
CX700 Storage
System
Cable to data
❑
ports to Fibre
Channel switch
or server HBA
ports
Cable storage-system data ports either to the Fibre Channel switch
connected to the server HBA ports or directly to the server HBA ports.
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide or storage-system
setup guide
Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify the HBA connections to the Fibre Channel
switch by checking the LED(s) for the switch port connected to each HBA
port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is green, which indicates that the HBA port is
logged in to the switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the following:
• The left LED is green and the right LED is off, which indicates that a
1-Gbit SP port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both LEDs are green, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left LED is blue and the right LED is off,
which indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to the switch port.
Go to step 13.
10 CX500i Storage ❑
System
Cable to data
ports to network,
or server HBA or ❑
NIC ports
Checkpoint - For a network connection with the server, verify the
storage-system connections to the network router or switch by checking
the LED(s) for the router or switch port connected to each SP port.
11 CX500i Storage
System
Configure iSCSi
storage-system
data ports
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to configure network parameters for the
12 Server With
CX500i Storage
System
Configure any
additional server
iSCSI initiator
ports
For NICs
13 Storage System
Set up security
7-40
Cable the storage-system iSCSI data ports either or to the network
Storage-system setup
connected to the server HBA or NIC ports or directly to the server HBA or guide
NICs ports.
storage-system iSCSI data ports.
Switch documentation
Storage-system setup
guide
Microsoft documentation
❑ Use Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator on the server to configure the iSCSI
initiators for each NIC port.
For iSCSI HBAs
❑ Use QLogic SANsurfer to configure the network parameters for each or for
QLogix SANsurfer
documentation
each HBA.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to define a global administrator and domain (if
not already defined) and any additional users.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere security
administrator’s guide
and Navisphere
Manager online help
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
14 Storage System ❑
Set Properties for
PowerPath
Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the following default
storage-system properties:
Reference Document
Navisphere CLI
reference
navicli -h hostname systemtype -config 3
navicli -h hostname failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP address or network name of an SP in the
storage system.
15 Fibre Channel
Switches
Zone additional
paths
For a Fibre Channel SAN
❑ Zone the Fibre Channel switches to provide a path from each additional
Switch management
documentation
HBA port (host initiator) to the SPs.
❑ If SAN Copy, MirrorView, or MirrorView/A is installed, create any required
zones.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify the switch
connections to the storage system.
16 Server
Make target SPs
available
❑ Restart the Host Agent, then use the Disk Management tool to scan for
Windows documentation
disks.
If the disks are not visible, scan for them once more.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere Manager’s Connectivity Status dialog box
to verify that each HBA is registered with the storage system.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and New Storage System
7-41
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
17 Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the server to a Storage Group
❑ Reboot the server so Windows recognizes the LUNs.
Windows documentation
Now the LUNs in the Storage Group look like any other disks in the server.
❑ Checkpoint - Use one of the following ways to verify that PowerPath sees PowerPath product
all the paths to the LUNs:
• PowerPath Administrator (Start > Programs > EMC > PowerPath
Administrator)
guide
• PowerPath command
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your PowerPath license key if you have one.
• Verify that the storage-system properties are as defined in step 14.
18 Storage System
Configure Event
Monitor
❑ If you will monitor storage-system events, use Navisphere Manger to apply Navisphere Manager
the desired event monitor templates to the storage system.
For a CX300, CX500, or CX700 storage system, go to step 21.
administrator’s guide
and online help.
For a CX500i storage system, continue to step 19.
19 CX500i Storage
System
Configure
optional CHAP
security
7-42
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to configure CHAP on the storage system, but
do not enable yet.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Storage-system setup
guide and Manager
online help
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
20 Server With
CX500i Storage
System
Configure
optional CHAP
security for new
iSCSI HBA or NIC
initiators
For iSCSI HBA Initiators
Storage-system setup
guide and SANsurfer
documentation
❑ Use QLogic SANsurfer to configure initiator CHAP on the HBA initiators.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to enable CHAP on the storage system
For NIC initiators
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to enable CHAP on the storage system.
❑ Use Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator to configure initiator CHAP on any
new NIC initiators.
21 Server
Make LUNs
available to
Windows
❑ Prepare the LUNs to receive data by creating partitions on them.
22 Server
If you have a PowerPath license key
Test PowerPath If your PowerPath license key is not registered, the load balancing policy is
with a license key restricted to basic failover.
Storage-system setup
guide and Microsoft
documentation
Storage-system setup
guide and Manager
online help
Host connectivity guide
or Windows
documentation
PowerPath product
guide
❑ View the LUNs available to the server using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=all class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen LUN using the following PowerPath
command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA or NIC sending I/O to LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and disconnect the cable to
that HB or NIC.
❑ View the output of the powermt display dev=x every=2 command, and
verify that
• The state of the uncabled path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining path(s) to the LUN, indicating that the
path failover was successful, and PowerPath is working properly.
❑ Reconnect the cable that you disconnected from the HBA or NIC.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and New Storage System
7-43
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
22 Server
❑
Test PowerPath
with a license key
(cont.)
If you did not follow the above steps exactly and caused any LUNs to
trespass, restore the LUNs to their original SP with the following
PowerPath command:
Reference Document
PowerPath Product
guide
powermt restore
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
7-44
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Windows Installation Checklists
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and Existing
Storage System
This checklist assumes that the existing Windows server and existing
storage system are already connected in a Fibre Channel SAN, iSCSI
network, or direct attach configuration. Tasks highlighted with grey
in the checklist should be performed before the service provider
arrives, except for the removal of ATF or CDE, which you can have
done by EMC Professional Services.
!
CAUTION
EMC no longer supports ATF or CDE. Before you transition your
server from ATF or CDE to PowerPath, you must
◆
Back up your server configurations.
◆
Back up data on all storage systems connected to the server.
◆
Remove ATF or CDE, which EMC recommends that EMC
Professional Services do, especially if your server configuration
is complex. If you want to remove it yourself, you must use the
procedure in the Removing ATF or CDE Software Before
Installing Other Failover Software document (P/N 069001173),
which is on the Powerlink website with this roadmap.
Simply removing ATF or CDE using the uninstall procedure in
the Windows ATF administrator’s guide or the Windows
utilities administrator’s guide may not return the server to its
original state, and may result in lost data.
If you are transitioning a MicroSoft Cluster Server (MSCS)
configuration from ATF or CDE to PowerPath, perform the procedure
in the checklist on each node in succession. While you perform the
procedure on one node, you can leave the cluster services active on
the other node, provided failure in a path to the storage system does
not occur.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and Existing Storage System
7-45
Windows Installation Checklists
The Without Access Logix column does not apply to CX300, CX500, CX500i,
and CX700 storage systems because they ship from the factory with the
Access Logix enabler installed.
Task
1
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install additional
HBAs or NICs
Without Access Logix
If you need additional HBAs or
❑
NICs to provide more paths to the
storage system, install these
HBAs.
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
2
3
4
7-46
Server
Remove ATF or
CDE
❑ If ATF or CDE is installed, then
Server
❑
Update Software
Server
Set HBA driver
properties
Reference Document
If you need additional HBAs to
HBA or NIC
provide more paths to the storage documentation (for
system, install these HBAs.
HBAs, see URL on 7-5)
CAUTION Do not connect cables
to the HBAs until you are told to
do so later in this procedure.
❑ If ATF or CDE is installed, then
before continuing either remove it
yourself (see caution before this
checklist) or arrange to have
EMC Professional Services
remove it.
Removing ATF or CDE
before continuing either remove it instruction sheet
yourself (see caution before this
checklist) or arrange to have
EMC Professional Services
remove it.
CAUTION When you are
prompted to restart the system
during the ATF removal
procedure, answer No and then
click Finish.Do not reboot until
you install PowerPath, even if the
instructions for installing software
(e.g. HBA driver) tell you to do so.
CAUTION When you are
prompted to restart the system
during the ATF removal
procedure, answer No and then
click Finish.Do not reboot until
you install PowerPath, even if the
instructions for installing software
(e.g. HBA driver) tell you to do so.
If the following software is
❑
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision ( 7-3),
update it:
• HBA or NIC driver
• Navisphere Host Agent
• admsnap
• admhost
If the following software is
currently installed and not at the
required minimum revision ( 7-3),
update it:
• HBA driver
• Navisphere Host Agent
❑ Make sure the HBA driver
❑ Make sure the HBA driver
properties are set to the values
required for CLARiiON.
properties are set to the values
required for CLARiiON.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
CAUTION Using improper
settings can cause erratic failover
behavior, such as greatly
increased I/O delays.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
HBA or NIC
documentation (for
HBAs, see URL on
7-5)
CX-Series Server
Software for Windows
Installation Guide
Host connectivity guide
and HBA documentation
(see URL on 7-5)
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
5
Server with
CX500i storage
system
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
For additional NICs
N/A
Microsoft documentation
❑ Download and install Microsoft
iSCSI Software Initiator.
❑ Use the appropriate Microsoft
network tool (for example, Start >
Settings > Network
Connections) to assign the
network parameters (IP address,
subnet mask, and gateway) for
each NIC.
For additional iSCSI HBAs
QLogic SANsurfer
documentation
❑ Download and install QLogic
SANsurfer.
❑ Use SANsurfer to assign the
network parameters (IP address,
subnet mask, and gateway) for
each iSCSI HBA.
6
Storage System
Update software
❑ If currently installed
❑ If currently installed
storage-system software is not at
the required minimum revision,
update it.
Navisphere Manager
storage-system software is not at administrator’s guide
the required minimum revision,
and online help
update it.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access
to data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
CAUTION During the software
update, hosts connected to the
storage system will lose access
to data if they do not have failover
software or if all paths to an SP
are down.
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
step 8.
For an FC4500 storage system, go to
step 8.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and Existing Storage System
7-47
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
7
With Access Logix
Reference Document
CX-Series or
For new or replacement HBAs
Navisphere CLI
For any HBAs
FC4700-Series
reference
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI ❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
Storage System
command to determine the
command to determine the
Set properties for
default storage-system type:
default storage-system type:
PowerPath
navicli -h hostname systemtype
navicli -h hostname systemtype
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
navicli -h hostname systemtype
-config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
For new or replacement HBAs
(cont.)
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
navicli -h hostname
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
7-48
Without Access Logix
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same time.
For any HBAs (cont.)
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
navicli -h hostname
failovermode 1
navicli -h hostname
arraycommpath 1
where hostname is the IP
address or network name of an
SP in the storage system.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere CLI
reference
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
7
With Access Logix
CX-Series or
FC4700-Series
Storage System
Set properties for
PowerPath
(cont.)
Without Access Logix
For existing HBAs
Reference Document
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
An existing HBA is one that is
registered with the storage system.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager’s
Failover Setup Wizard (selected
from the Tools menu on the
toolbar) to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA ports
(initiators):
Initiator Type to CLARiiON Open
Failover mode to 1
Array commpath to Enabled
8
FC4500 Storage ❑ Connect a computer to the serial ❑ Connect a computer to the serial
System
port on the storage system.
port on the storage system.
Set properties for
For new HBAs
For any HBAs
PowerPath
❑ From the computer connected to ❑ From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
use the following Navisphere CLI
command to determine the
command to determine the
default storage-system type:
default storage-system type:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype
navicli -np -d device
systemtype
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
If the default storage-system
system type is not 3 (CLARiiON
Open), use the following
Navisphere CLI command to set
it to 3:
navicli -np -d device
systemtype -config 3
navicli -np -d device
systemtype -config 3
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same
time.
Storage-system setup
guide
Navisphere CLI
reference
CAUTION The above command
reboots both SPs at the same time.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and Existing Storage System
7-49
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
8
With Access Logix
FC4500 Storage ❑
System
Set properties for
PowerPath
(cont.)
Without Access Logix
From the computer connected to ❑
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
default storage-system
properties:
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
navicli -np -d device
arraycommpath 1
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
where device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
For existing HBAs
An existing HBA is one that is
registered with the storage system.
❑ From the computer connected to
the storage system’s serial port,
use the following Navisphere CLI
commands to set the following
storage-system properties for the
server’s existing HBA existing
ports (initiators):
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -type 3
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -failovermode 1
navicli -np -d device
storagegroup -sethost -host
servername -arraycommpath 1
where
device is the name of the
computer port connected to the
storage-system serial port (for
example, com1).
servername is the name of the
server with the HBAs
7-50
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Reference Document
Navisphere CLI
reference
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
9
With Access Logix
Server
❑
Install PowerPath
Install PowerPath.
❑ Reboot the server to complete
the installation of PowerPath.
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
❑ Install PowerPath.
PowerPath release
notes and PowerPath for
Windows installation
and administrator’s
guide
❑ Reboot the server to complete
the installation of PowerPath.
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
❑ Install any PowerPath patches
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
from the Software downloads
page on the EMC Powerlink
website:
http://powerlink.emc.com
http://powerlink.emc.com
❑ Checkpoint - Use one of the
❑ Checkpoint - Use one of the
following ways to verify that
PowerPath sees the paths to the
LUNs:
• PowerPath Administrator
(Start > Programs > EMC >
PowerPath Administrator)
following ways to verify that
PowerPath sees the paths to the
LUNs:
• PowerPath Administrator
(Start > Programs > EMC >
PowerPath Administrator)
• PowerPath command
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
• PowerPath command
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
If PowerPath does not see the
LUNs
• Verify the server’s connection
to the Storage Group.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that you registered your
PowerPath license key if you
have one.
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 7 or 8.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Disk
Management to verify each path
to the storage system.
PowerPath product
guide
• Verify that the storage-system
properties are as defined in
step 7 or 8.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Disk
Windows documentation
Management to verify each path
to the storage system.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and Existing Storage System
7-51
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
10 Server
Cable additional
HBAs tor NICs to
Fibre Channel
switches,
network, or
storage-system
data ports
For any storage system except a
CX500i
For any storage system except a
CX500i
Storage-system setup
guide
Cable any additional HBA ports to the ❑
Fibre Channel switch connected to the
storage system or to the
storage-system Fibre Channel data
ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
Cable an additional HBA ports to
the Fibre Channel switch
connected to the storage system
or to the storage-system Fibre
Channel data ports.
❑ Checkpoint - For a SAN, verify
the HBA connections to the
switch by checking the LED(s) for
the switch port connected to each
HBA port.
the storage-system connections
to the switch by checking the
LED(s) for the switch port
connected to each HBA port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 1-Gbit switch - LED is
green, which indicates that the
HBA port is logged in to the
switch port.
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
For a 2-Gbit switch - One of the
following:
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which
indicates that a 1-Gbit SP port
is logged in to the switch port.
• The left LED is green and the
right LED is off, which
indicates that a 1-Gbit SP port
is logged in to the switch port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxB2 switch, both
LEDs are green, which
indicates that a 2-Gbit HBA
port is logged in to the switch
port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
• For a DS-xxM2 switch, the left
LED is blue and the right LED
is off, which indicates that a
2-Gbit HBA port is logged in to
the switch port.
For a CX500i storage system
N/A
❑ Cable any additional HBA or
NICs ports to the network
connected to the storage-system
iSCSI data ports or directly to the
storage-system iSCSI data ports.
7-52
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Storage-system setup
guide
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
10 Server
❑
Cable additional
HBAs tor NICs to
Fibre Channel
switches,
network, or
storage-system
data ports (cont.)
Without Access Logix
Checkpoint - For a network
connection with the server, verify
the storage-system connections
to the network router or switch by
checking the LED(s) for the router
or switch port connected to each
SP port.
Reference Document
Switch documentation
11 Server With a
For NICs
N/A
CX500i Storage
❑ Use Microsoft iSCSI Software
System
Initiator on the server to configure
Configure
the iSCSI initiators for each NIC
additional server
port.
iSCSI initiator
ports
For iSCSI HBAs
Storage-system setup
guide
❑ Use QLogic SANsurfer to
configure the network parameters
for each or for each HBA.
12 Fibre Channel
Switches
Zone additional
paths
For a SAN
❑ Zone the Fibre Channel switches Zone the Fibre Channel switches to
Switch management
documentation
to provide a path from each
provide a path from each additional
additional HBA port (host initiator) HBA port (host initiator) to the SPs.
to the SPs.
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system.
13 Server
Register
additional HBAs
or NICs with
storage system
For a SAN
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch
management software to verify
the switch connections to the
storage system
❑ Restart the Host Agent or run the ❑ Use the Disk Management tool to Windows documentation
Server Utility, then use the Disk
Management tool to scan for
disks.
❑ Checkpoint - Use Navisphere
Manager’s Connectivity Status
dialog box to verify that each HBA
is registered with the storage
system.
scan for disks.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and Existing Storage System
7-53
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
14 CX500i Storage
System
Configure
optional
storage-system
CHAP security
If CHAP security is configured for the N/A
storage-system SP port connected to
a new NIC or HBA initiator, the new
initiator must use CHAP. If you want a
new initiator to use the credentials
already set for that SP port, you do not
need to configure the storage-system
CHAP for the new initiator.
Reference Document
Storage-system setup
guide and Manager
online help
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
configure initiator CHAP on the
storage system for each new NIC
or HBA that needs it configured.
15 Server With
CX500i Storage
System
Configure
optional server
CHAP security
If you configured CHAP security on the N/A
storage system, you must configure it
for any new iSCSI initiator’s in the
storage system.
Storage-system setup
guide and Manager
online help
For NIC Initiators
❑ If CHAP is not already enabled on
the storage system, use
Navisphere Manager to enable it.
❑ Use Microsoft iSCSI Software
Initiator to configure initiator
CHAP on the new NIC initiators
on the server.
For iSCSI HBAs
❑ If CHAP is already enabled on the
storage system, use Navisphere
Manager to disable it.
❑ Use QLogic SANsurfer to
Storage-system setup
guide and QLogix
SANsurfer
documentation
configure initiator CHAP on the
new iSCSI HBA initiators on the
server.
❑ If you disabled CHAP on the
N/A
storage system, use Navisphere
Manager to re-enable CHAP on
the storage system.
7-54
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Storage-system setup
guide and Manager
online help
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
16 Server
Make LUNs
available to
additional HBAs
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to
N/A
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
disconnect and then reconnect
the server and its Storage Group.
❑ Restart the Host Agent, then use
Windows documentation
the Disk Management tool to
scan for disks.
For an FC4500 storage system
For an FC4500 storage system
❑ Disconnect the computer from
❑ Disconnect the computer from
the serial port on the storage
system.
17 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key
Storage-system setup
guide
the serial port on the storage
system.
If you have a PowerPath license key If you have a PowerPath license key PowerPath product
guide
If your PowerPath license key is not
If your PowerPath license key is not
registered, the load balancing policy is registered, the load balancing policy is
restricted to basic failover.
restricted to basic failover.
❑ View the LUNs available to the
❑ View the LUNs available to the
server using the following
PowerPath command:
server using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
powermt display dev=all
class=clariion
❑ Choose one available LUN to
❑ Choose one available LUN to
receive I/O for the test.
receive I/O for the test.
❑ View the paths to the chosen
❑ View the paths to the chosen
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
LUN using the following
PowerPath command:
powermt display dev=x every=2
powermt display dev=x every=2
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
where x is a pseudo device that
represents the chosen LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Start I/O to the LUN.
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
❑ Identify the HBA sending I/O to
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
LUN by viewing the output of the
powermt display dev=x every=2
command, and disconnect the
cable to that HBA.
PowerPath Checklist — Existing Windows Server and Existing Storage System
7-55
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Without Access Logix
Reference Document
17 Server
Test PowerPath
with a license
key (cont.)
❑ View the output of the powermt
❑ View the output of the powermt
PowerPath product
guide
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• The state of the uncabled
path(s) becomes “dead.”
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
• I/O continues to the remaining
path(s) to the LUN, indicating
that the path failover was
successful, and PowerPath is
working properly.
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
7-56
display dev=x every=2
command, and verify that
❑ Reconnect the cable that you
disconnected from the HBA.
❑ If you did not follow the above
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
steps exactly and caused any
LUNs to trespass, restore the
LUNs to their original SP with the
following PowerPath command:
powermt restore
powermt restore
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Windows Installation Checklists
DMP Configurations for Windows
Read this section if you are installing a Windows 2000 VERITAS DMP
configuration with a new server and a new storage system. A new
server and a new storage system are defined as follows:
new server - A server running Windows 2000 and not connected to
any storage system.
new storage system - A CX300, CX500, or CX700 storage system that
has factory default settings and has never been connected to a server.
Topics relating to the checklist for Windows DMP configurations are
◆
◆
◆
◆
Required Host
Software Revisions
Required Host Software Revisions................................................ 7-57
Prerequisites ..................................................................................... 7-58
Documentation................................................................................. 7-59
DMP Checklist — New Windows Server and New Storage
System .............................................................................................. 7-60
This section lists the required software revisions for Windows 2000
configurations.
◆
Windows 2000 operating system revision and any service pack
listed in the EMC Support Matrix on the Powerlink website
(http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
HBA driver revision listed in the EMC Support Matrix on the
Powerlink website (http://powerlink.emc.com)
◆
VxVM 3.1 for Windows 2000 with HotFix01 or higher
Refer to the EMC Support Matrix and the EMC PowerPath for Windows
administrator’s guide on the Powerlink website
(http://powerlink.emc.com) for the specific revision required for your
Windows 2000 version.
DMP Configurations for Windows
7-57
Windows Installation Checklists
Prerequisites
◆
All switches must be installed.
◆
Storage systems must be set up, initialized (if required), and
connected to switches, and any optional storage-system software
(Access Logix, SnapView, SAN Copy, MirrorView,
MirrorView/A) you have must be installed.
◆
You have installed Navisphere Manager.
◆
If any storage systems have SnapView, the admsnap utility must
be installed on the servers that will be the SnapView production
and secondary hosts.
◆
If any storage systems have SAN Copy, the admhost utility must
be installed on the servers that have access to LUNs participating
in a SAN Copy session.
◆
You must have a host that is
• Running an operating system that can support the Navisphere
Manager 6.X browser-based client. For an up-to-date list of
such operating systems, refer to the Navisphere Manager 6.X
release notes on http://powerlink.emc.com.
• On a network that is connected to the storage-system servers
and that will be connected to the SPs in the storage systems.
◆
7-58
You must have planned your LUNs and RAID Groups, and
Storage Groups if you have Access Logix. Be sure to consider
requirements for SAN Copy, SnapView, and MirrorView if you
have this software. The EMC CLARiiON CX300, CX500, CX500i,
and CX700 Storage Systems Configuration Planning Guide (P/N
300-001-273) will help you with this planning.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Windows Installation Checklists
Documentation
Each checklist refers to some or all of the documents listed below. We
recommend that you load these documents on your service laptop
before starting the installation.
◆
Documentation that ships with the HBA and HBA driver.
This documentation is also available from the following websites.
For Emulex HBAs and drivers:
http://www.emulex.com/ts/docoem/framemc.htm
For QLogic HBAs and drivers:
http://www.qlogic.com/support/drivers_software.asp
and select EMC in the OEM-approved Drivers/Firmware list at the
bottom of the page.
◆
Documentation that ships with the
• Switches and switch management software
• Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system
• VERITAS Volume Manager
◆
EMC Navisphere Host Agent and CLI for Windows Version 6.X
Installation Guide (P/N 069001151)
or
EMC CX-Series Server Software for Windows Installation Guide
(P/N300-002-038)
◆
EMC Navisphere Command Line Interface (CLI) Reference
(P/N 069001038)
◆
EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001125)
◆
EMC Navisphere Security Administrator’s Guide (P/N 069001124)
◆
EMC Host Connectivity Guide for Windows (P/N 300-000-603)
DMP Configurations for Windows
7-59
Windows Installation Checklists
DMP Checklist — New Windows Server and New Storage System
Tasks highlighted with grey in the checklist should be completed
before the service provider arrives.
Task
1
2
3
With Access Logix
Reference Document
Server
Install HBAs and
driver
❑ Install HBAs.
HBA documentation
(see URL on 7-5)
Server
Set HBA driver
properties
❑ Set the HBA driver parameters to the values required for CLARiiON.
Storage System
Configure
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to set general storage-system properties.
❑ Install HBA driver.
CAUTION Using improper settings can cause erratic failover behavior,
such as greatly increased I/O delays.
❑ Use Navisphere Manager to create RAID Groups, bind LUNs, create
Host connectivity guide
and HBA documentation
(see URL on 7-5)
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Storage Groups, and assign LUNs to Storage Groups.
4
5
Storage System
Set up Event
Monitor
❑ Plan your monitoring configuration.
Storage System
Set properties
❑ Use the following Navisphere CLI commands to set the default
❑
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
Use Navisphere Manager to set user options, create templates, and set up and online help
your monitoring configuration.
storage-system arraycommpath and failover mode properties:
navicli -h sp arraycommpath 1
navicli -h sp storagegroup -sethost -host windows_host -failovermode
1
where
sp is the IP address or network name of the SP in the storage system.
windows_host is the name of the Windows server.
7-60
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Navisphere CLI
reference
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
6
Switch
Zone switches
for one path
from server to
storage system
With Access Logix
Reference Document
For a SAN
Documentation that
ships with the switches
❑ Zone switches so that only one path exists between a server and the
storage system.
This provides a path from one host initiator (HBA port) to only one SP.
You will need to know the WWPN of a host initiator - available in the
switch’s name server table.
❑ Reboot Windows.
Windows documentation
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify that the HBA and Documentation that
storage system are logged in to the switch as fabric ports, and to verify that ships with the switches
the HBA sees only the target (SP) to which it is zoned.
7
8
Storage System
Register one
host initiator
❑ Use the Connectivity Status dialog in Navisphere Manager to register
only one host initiator with the storage system.
Storage System ❑ Use Navisphere Manager to connect the host initiator to its Storage Group.
Connect host
initiator to
Storage Group
❑ Use the Disk Management tool to scan for disks.
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Windows documentation
If the disks are not visible, scan for them once more.
9
Server
Install Volume
Manager
10 Server
Install the
CLARiiON DMP
driver
❑ Install VERITAS Volume Manager for Windows 2000 on the server.
❑ Install any recommended VERITAS updates.
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
If the server is running VERITAS Volume Manager 3.1 with Service Pack 1, skip
to step 11.
Server is running a version of Volume Manager prior to version 3.1 with
Service Pack 1
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
❑ Download the CLARiiON DMP driver to the server from Services on the
VERITAS website.
❑ In the directory where you downloaded the driver, double-click the
install.cmd file to install the driver.
❑ Reboot Windows.
11 Server
Add storage
system to DMP
management
❑ Use VERITAS Enterprise Administrator to turn off Exclude in the array
settings menu for a LUN’s path for the storage system.
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
DMP Checklist — New Windows Server and New Storage System
7-61
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
12 Switch
For a SAN
Zone switches
❑ Zone switches so that all desired paths exists between a server and the
additional paths
storage system.
from server to
You will need to know the WWPN of the host initiators - available in the
storage system
switch’s name server table.
Reference Document
Documentation that
ships with the switches
❑ Checkpoint - Use switch management software to verify that the HBAs
and storage system are logged in to the switch as fabric ports, and to verify
that each HBA sees only the targets (SPs) to which it is zoned.
13 Storage System
Register
additional host
initiators
❑ Use the Connectivity Status dialog in Navisphere Manager to register the Navisphere Manager
additional host initiators with the storage system.
14 Storage System ❑ Use Navisphere Manager to disconnect and then reconnect the server
from its Storage Group.
Connect Storage
Group to
You can do this from the Host tab of the Storage Group Properties
additional host
dialog.
❑ Use the Disk Management tool to scan for disks.
administrator’s guide
and online help
Navisphere Manager
administrator’s guide
and online help
Windows documentation
If the disks are not visible, scan for them once more.
❑
15 Server
Make LUNs
available to both
SPs
16 Server
Verify DMP
installation
Use the Disk Management tool to scan for disks.
❑ Log into VERITAS Enterprise Administrator (VEA).
Windows documentation
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
❑ Click the host name for the server.
❑ Click disks.
❑ Click a device that you know belongs to the CLARiiON storage system.
❑ Click the paths tab for that device.
❑ Verify that the device has primary and secondary paths to it.
❑ Verify the state of the device (enabled or disabled).
7-62
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
VERITAS Volume
Manager documentation
Windows Installation Checklists
Task
With Access Logix
Reference Document
17 Windows Server
2003 Server
Install optional
CLARiiON VSS
provider
❑ If you want applications to access SnapView functionality on the storage
CX-Series Server
Software for Windows
Installation Guide
system using the VSS framework or other APIs, Install the optional
CLARiiON VSS provider on the server.
Note that Navisphere CLI must be installed on the server.
You are now ready to set up any optional software, such as SnapView
or MirrorView, on the storage system.
DMP Checklist — New Windows Server and New Storage System
7-63
Windows Installation Checklists
Using Windows DMP
7-64
When you use Windows 2000 DMP for CLARiiON, you need to take
into account the following behaviors for LUNs under DMP
management:
◆
After Windows 2000 reboots, one SP owns all the LUNs. If you
want the other SP to own any LUNs, you must manually transfer
ownership of (trespass) those LUNs to the other SP using the
Navisphere Manager or CLI.
◆
Windows DMP for CLARiiON does not support auto-restore for
LUNs. If a failure occurs in a path to an SP, Windows DMP
transfers ownership of LUNs to the other SP, but it does not
transfer ownership back to the original SP when the path is
repaired. The server does not lose access to the transferred LUNs.
If you want the original SP to access any LUNs for load balancing,
you must manually transfer ownership of those LUNs back to the
SP using the Navisphere Manager or CLI.
◆
If I/O is occurring between a server and a LUN, you cannot use
Navisphere to transfer ownership of the LUN from one SP to the
other SP.
◆
Adding more than 40 LUNs to a Storage Group may cause
Windows 2000 to crash.
◆
The Navisphere Host Agent does not register host information
with the storage system correctly.
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
A
nvisible Body Tag
Customer Support
This appendix reviews the EMC process for detecting and resolving
software problems, and provides essential questions that you should
answer before contacting the EMC Customer Support Center.
This appendix covers the following topics:
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
Overview of Detecting and Resolving Problems .........................A-2
Troubleshooting the Problem ..........................................................A-3
Before Calling the Customer Support Center ...............................A-4
Documenting the Problem...............................................................A-5
Reporting a New Problem ...............................................................A-6
Sending Problem Documentation...................................................A-7
Customer Support
A-1
Customer Support
Overview of Detecting and Resolving Problems
EMC software products are supported directly by the EMC Customer
Support Center in the United States.
EMC uses the following process to resolve customer problems with
its software products (Figure A-1).
Problem
Detection
Refer to this
Customer Support
Appendix for Instructions
Collect Problem
Information as
Directed
Contact the EMC Customer
Support Center:
(800) SVC-4EMC
U.S.:
Canada: (800) 543-4SVC
Worldwide: (508) 497-7901
Confirm that the
Problem is Software
Related
Call will be Directed
to an EMC Software
Support Engineer
Problem is
Tracked and
Managed to
Resolution
Figure A-1
A-2
Problem Detection and Resolution Process
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Customer Support
Troubleshooting the Problem
Please perform the relevant diagnostic steps before you contact the
EMC Customer Support Center:
1. Read the documentation carefully.
2. Reconstruct the events leading up to the problem and describe
them in writing.
3. Run some test cases to reproduce the problem.
If you encounter a problem that requires technical programming or
analysis, call the nearest EMC office or contact the EMC Customer
Support Center at one of the following numbers:
United States:
(800) 782-4362 (SVC-4EMC)
Canada:
(800) 543-4782 (543-4SVC)
Worldwide:
(508) 497-7901
Please do not request a specific support representative unless one has already
been assigned to your particular system problem.
For additional information on EMC products and services available
to customers and partners, refer to the EMC Powerlink website at:
http://powerlink.EMC.com
Troubleshooting the Problem
A-3
Customer Support
Before Calling the Customer Support Center
Have the following information available before calling the Customer
Support Center or your support representative (if one has been
assigned to you):
❑ Your company name
❑ Your name
❑ Your phone number
❑ For an existing problem, the problem tracking system ID, if one
was previously assigned to the problem by a support
representative
A-4
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Customer Support
Documenting the Problem
If the EMC Customer Support Center requests information regarding
the problem, please document it completely, making sure to include
the following information:
❑ Your company name and address
❑ Your name
❑ Your telephone number
❑ The importance of the problem, so that it can be assigned a
priority level
To expedite the processing of your support request, you can
photocopy this list and include it with the package.
Documenting the Problem
A-5
Customer Support
Reporting a New Problem
For a new problem, please provide the following information:
❑ Release level of the software that you are running
❑ Software installation parameters
❑ Host type on which you are running
❑ Operating system you are running and its release number
❑ Functions of the software that you are running
❑ Whether you can reproduce the problem
❑ Previous occurrences of the problem
❑ Whether the software has ever worked correctly
❑ Time period that the software did work properly
❑ Conditions under which the software worked properly
❑ Changes to your system between the time the software worked
properly and the problem began
❑ Exact sequence of events that led to the system error
❑ Message numbers and complete text of any messages that the
system produced
❑ Log file dated near the time the error occurred
❑ Results from tests that you have run
❑ Other related system output
❑ Other information that may help solve the problem
A-6
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Customer Support
Sending Problem Documentation
Use one of the following methods to send documentation of the
problem to the EMC Customer Support Center:
◆
E-mail
◆
FTP
◆
U.S. mail to the following address:
EMC Customer Support Center
171 South Street
Hopkinton, MA 01748-9103
If the problem was assigned a number or a specific support
representative, please include that information in the address as
well.
Sending Problem Documentation
A-7
Customer Support
A-8
EMC Installation Roadmap for CX-Series and FC-Series Storage Systems
Download PDF

advertising